Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2001-R0443 - Contract For Mcalister Park Construction - Hunter Construction Company - 10_11_2001Resolution No. 2001-Ro443 October 11, 2001 Item No. 78 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract for the Bill McAlister Park Construction, ITB #226-01/RS, by and between the City of Lubbock and Hunter Construction Company of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this I Ith day of October , 2001. a0A WINDY r ON, MAYOR ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: c Victor Kilmankpurchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Contract Manager/Attorney gs:L:/ccdocs/Hunter Const. Co.res Oct. 2, 2001 PWR BOND CHECK BEST RATING ---- LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE IO 15 8Y ` f� CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION ITB #226-01/RS " A City Of Planned Progress" CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas , 137 ITB #226-01/RS, Addendum #1 W City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13r" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH:(806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #1 . ITB #226-01 /RS Bill McAlister Park Construction MAILED TO VENDOR: September 12, 2001 CLOSE DATE: September 19, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find enclosed the two (2) page Addendum #1 issued by Schrickel Rollins and Associates., Inc. / Chapman Harvey Architects. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUB OCK #Rn ?fffifed Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 226-01 /RSadd 1 SECTION 00900 ADDENDA ADDENDUM NUMBER ONE BILL McALISTER PARK LUBBOCK, TEXAS ISSUE DATE: SEPTEMBER 12, 2001 BID DATE: SEPTEMBER 19, 2001 ISSUED BY: Schrickel Rollins and Assoc., Inc. / Chapman Harvey Architects v� 1. This addendum modifies and extends the requirements of the plans and/or the project manual for the above referenced project, dated August 27, 2001. 2. Staple this addendum to the inside of the rear cover of the 8'/2'x11" project manual. 3. Mark all items notated to be marked on the plan sheets and specification pages. 4. Note receipt of all addenda on the line provided in the Bid Proposal. PROJECT MANUAL BID SUBMITTAL 1. Page 3: Change the amount of Liquidated Damages to the sum of $300 (Three Hundred Dollars) per day. SECTION 02510 —FLEXIBLE BASE 1. 2.01 MATERIALS: Delete the first sentence in its entirety. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS SHEET 2 — SITE PLAN 1. Three flagpoles are required, one per field. SHEET 7 — CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT "B" 1. The entire parking lot shall be constructed of 8" Flexible Base. No striping is required. 2. Detail 1 - Concrete Curb and Gutter: Change the overall dimension from 30" to 24" SHEET 10 — DETAILS 1. Detail 3 — Accessible Parking Space: Delete the following detail reference, " 4" Asphalt on" SHEET U1 — UTILITY LAYOUT 1. Add the following note: "Water and Sanitary Sewer Mainline Service in the public Right of Way will be provided by the City of Lubbock. Construction is planned to be completed by December 15, 2001. SHEET 1-1 — IRRIGATION PLAN 1. IRRIGATION LEGEND a. Pop-up spray heads shall be Rainbird 1804 prs 4" pop -ups. b. Change the flow rate on Toro 640 spray rotors with No. 40 nozzle to 6.7 gpm. 2. Some valves and mainlines are intentionally oversized. The contractor shall. install the sizes 4219 ' , �- ' indicated onthe plans osominimum. - 3. Some ofthe valves are labeled incorrectly. New numbers will baassigned stokahardate Each valve shall bawired toaseparate station onthe controller. / - SHEET 1-2—IRRIGATION PLAN 1. The booster pump location shall bechanged hodirectly south of the transformer and controllers. ^ Main lines shall bo rerouted accordingly. ' 2- Add the following note: "The contractor shall suppk/'eight(8)Four W^1inches isolation valves on the main line. The locations shall boselected bvthe ownar.^ - SHEET 1'3—IRRIGATION DETAILS 1. POP-UP RISER ASSEMBLY DETAIL: Delete the swing joint. Add. in its p|000. acut-off nipple ` � sized homatch the pop-up head. 2. MOISTURE SENSOR DETAIL: Delete the detail in its entirety. j 3. GEAR DRIVEN ROTOR DETAIL: Pipe and fittings size shall match the rotor inlet size. 4. QUICK -COUPLING VALVE DETAIL: Pipe and fittings shall beminimum one (1^) inch. � S. PUMP STATION DETAIL o. Add the following note. "Contractor shall provide afive inch thick concrete pod. ban (10') �~ feet long bveight (8')feet wide. The pump station shall becentered inthe pod.^ ' b. The pump station'shall be equipped with a pressure sensing circuit for low inlet pressure shut down, set ot1Opsi, with manual reset. END OF ADDENDUM NO. ONE .m CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ITB NUMBER: 226-011RS PROJECT NUMBER: 9128.9246.30000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT E; INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS n n e, Fa NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITB #226-01IRS Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 19th day of September, 2001, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project with a budget amount of $1,698,525.00: "BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 19th day of September, 2001, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 27th day of September, 2001, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or su erior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. PM It shall be each bidders soleresponsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on 11th day of September, 2001 at 9:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock, Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00 refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Chapman Harvey Architects, 612 Broadway, Lubbock, Texas 79401, Phone: (806) 749-1154. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. , Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in '< "consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. if you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS P" 1 BID DELIVERY. TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 19th day of September, 2001 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left- hand corner: "ITB #226-01/RS, BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. 2 PRE -BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non-mandatory12re-bid meeting will be held at 9:00 a.m.. September 11th. 2001 in Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock. Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory, The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and -must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. 1 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all .•• requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. w.; 5 BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. �.. 8 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 8.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 8.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any �,,,, other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 9.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 10 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 11 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 11.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 11.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 1625 131 Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 12 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 12.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within ONE HUNDRED THIRTY (130) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 12.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 13 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 14 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute �^ an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements ,. contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. r"* 15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve tr^ 3 the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 16 GUARANTEES 16.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 16.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 16.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 16.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 17 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the t J Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 18 PROTECTION OF THE WORK r_ The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. e' 4 r G 20 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 21 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of *+ barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 22 EXPLOSIVES 22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 22.3 In all cases where explosiveo are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and k telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. + 24 INSURANCE 24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of '* this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. ..� 24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the . alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on ' this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide .� 5 r■e 0" to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 25 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 26 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the �.• work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 27 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or .., decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 28 PREPARATION FOR BID 28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. �.J We 30 28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. if — the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 28.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been _ opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. 7 31 BID AWARD 31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to accept the Bid Items and Bid Options in any order or combination that serves its best interest. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the total bid for Bid Items 1 through 8 and any accepted Bid Options. 31.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. - 31.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. — 31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. — 31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER.FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. BID SUBMITTAL r.. BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: September 19, 2001 PROJECT NUMBER: #226-01/RS - BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION f i of Hunter Construction Company (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) e+*e ,ntlemen be Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. �. DEMOLITION ENTIRE SITE: Removal and legal disposal of existing trees, fencing, all obstructions and miscellaneous other items, as shown on the plans or where directed by the owner. Shall include all preparation, material, equipment, labor, tools, supervision, incidentals, and barricades. MATERIALS:Th--ee Thousand seven hundred and fifty—four dollars--- ($ 3,754.00----------- --) ERVICES: Twenty thousand dollars---------------------------- -- ($ 20,000.00-------------) dollars-- TOTAL BID ITEM #1:Twenty—three thousand seven hundred fifty—four ($ n.75¢.00-------------) EARTHWORK & GRADING: Approved earthwork and grading. Shall include all cut and fill material, fill preparation, material, equipment, labor, tools and supervision and all incidentals, complete in place as -+ shown on the plans or where directed by owner. MATERIALS: One hundred and fifty thousand dollars ----------------- ($ 150,000.00------------� :ERVICES: Two hundred thirty—one thousand six hundred sixty—nine($ 231,669.00------------) TOTAL BID ITEM #2: Three hundred eighty—one thousand six hundred six($ 381, 669.00------------ ) ty nine dollars -------------------------------- SITEWORK: Install water line, sewer line, trenching, backfill and , complete in place as shown on the plans and specifications, or where directed by owner. Shall include all materials, preparation, equipment, labor, tools, supervision, incidentals, and barricades complete in place. ,1ATERIALS:Si xteen thousand dollars ----------------------------- ($ 16,000.00------------� '3ERVICES: Fifteen thousand four hundred sixty dollars---------- ($ 15,460.00------------j TOTAL BID ITEM #3: Thirty—one thousand four hundred and sixty dollar( 31, 460.00-------------) 0 {4; ,,,• BUILDINGS: Concession stand, restrooms, pavilion, and press boxes including all work associated with =" electrical, mechanical, plumbing, masonry, metals, doors, windows, wood, furnishings, equipment, finishes, preparation, equipment, labor, tools, supervision and incidentals, complete in place as shown on t the plans and specifications, or where directed by owner. p-;MATERIALS: Four hundred three thousand two hundred forty-six dol12$s 403,246.00-- tSERVICES:- 7"�i'0 TOTAL BID ITEM #4:r-(/ ���ir�i� ��JL��F�7(�/Syl�'✓�%(��t!'�7/i��1�1 ($1�15,So�.O� --'— �� F f -ice✓ F;5.. CONCRETE WORK: Furnish and install all concrete other than building foundations as shown on the plans and specifications, or where directed by owner. Shall include all preparation, materials, equipment, labor, tools, supervision and incidentals, complete in place. .. .. _.. .. 11 111 11 SERVICES: T.. . . .. =r • • • 11 TOTAL BID ITEM #5� e h id thia;'t�z=two thcuzsand -twn hiindrPc9 and ($ 2- 252.00------------- ) lfift: -two dollars------------------ .`6. FENCING: Furnish and install all chain link fencing backstops, and dugouts as shown on the plans and specifications, or where directed by owner. Shall include ail preparation, material, equipment, labor, tools, supervision, and incidentals. MATERIALS: sixty thousand dollars------------------------------- ($ 601000.00-------------) k SERVICES:-:;ght�z thousand dollars----------------------------- ($ 80,000.00-------------) ,„TOTAL BID ITEM #6:t-;nP hundred forty thousand dollars------------- ($140, 000.00------------- ) 7. TREE PLANTING: Furnish and establish all turfgrass and tree plantings, all associated work as shown on the plans and specifications, or where directed by owner. Shall include all preparation, material, equipment, labor, tools supervision, and incidentals complete in place. MATERIALS: pG.,ty thrat-35;apd dollar s--------------------------------($ 40, 000.00-------------) SERVICES: Twenty -loin' thrausanr� twn h1incirerl d9n11 ars---------- ----($ 24, 200.00-------------) TOTAL BID ITEM #7:gi5Gty=four thousand i-wr) hundred r9al lars--------- ($ 64, 200.00-------------) „ 3. IRRIGATION: Furnish and install all irrigation conduits, heads, controllers, valves, wiring, trenching, backfill, incidentals, and all associated work as shown on the plans and specifications, or where directed -, by owner. Shall include all preparation, material, equipment, labor, tools, supervision, and incidentals, complete in place. MATERIALS: Sixty thousand dollars -------------------------------- ($ 60,000.00-------------) SERVICES: Cne hundred thousand dollars -------------------------- ($ 100,000.00------------- � r"+TOTAL BID ITEM #8:Cne hundred and sixty thousand dollars---------- ($160,000.00-------------) :TOTAL BID: Items 1-8. Furnish and install demolition, earthwork, and grading, sitework, buildings, concrete i"`°ork, fencing, turfgrass and tree plantings, and irrigation. ' MATERIALS: Eight hundred thiM—three thousand dollars ---- ($_ 81 � , n00 _ nn----------� ERVICES: Five hundred fifty—five thousand seven hundred and ($ 555r �R7_00----------- eighty—seven dollars------------------------------- =TOTAL BID AMOUNT: Y _halsand ($11 388. 7 7.00----------- -° seven hundred and eighty—seven aollgrs-------- iPTION #1: (DEDUCT) 20 day extension of the time required for construction from 130 days to 150 days. `:,MATERIALS: None------------------------------------------------- ($ —ERVICES: Seven thousand dollars----- OTAL OPTION #1: (DEDUCT) Seven thousand dollars----------------- ($ 7, 000.00-------------) OPTION #2: (DEDUCT) Furnish and installation of the parking Iot perimeter fencing (see page 10, detail 10) 1ATERIALS: Twenty-eight thousand dollars------------------------ ($ 28 , 000.00-- ) --------------------------- SERVICES: Ten thousand dollars------- -- ---- ($ 10�000.00----- •} 'OTAL OPTION #2: (DEDUCT) Thirty-eight thousand dollars ------------ ($ 3^000.00-------------) t1F)PTION #3: (DEDUCT) Furnish and installation of the Open Air Eight Column Pavilion "Breezeway" (see page A5) MATERIALS: Thirty thousand dollars----------------------------- ($ �n, nnn _ nn-------------) >ERVICES: Eicfhteen thousand six hundred fifteen of l a_rs---------4 i g, ti1 ri_ 00------------4 TOTAL OPTION #3: (DEDUCT) Fort-�z—ei ght thousand six hundrPr3 fifteen-4d8, F1 S nn------------ -) (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written a Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 130 (ONE HUNDRED THIRTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $0 (ZERO) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set 7orth herein above for completion of this project,. all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract iecuments. P" Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with nstruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the .7pidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days xp•after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the Mans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to ommence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on _ flhich he has bid, as provided in the contract documents. R 9 M'* t Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for N/A 4 1..Dollars ($ N/A ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Five__ Percent of Bid Amount Dollars ($ 5% of Bid), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Locat Government Code 252.043A (a), a l competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. .m (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: i Secretary Joanne Thomasson .� Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. n„P Date q/Tl Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date 9,0 10 ed Si Jim D.Hunter, President (Printed or Typed Name) Hunter Construction Company Company P.C. BOX 2587 Address Lubbock Lli hhork City, County Texas 79402 State Zip Code Telephone: -(806-) - 799-434:9 Fax: (806) 793- 6367 MNVBE Firm: Woman Black American (-I Hispanic American I I Asian Pacific American I Other a_ 4 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No °^ Royal Concrete, Inc. 1 ❑ 2. Lone Star Dirt & Paving ❑ �j All Seasons Property Care p TurfMasters n j Lubbock Glass & Mirror, Inc. ❑ } Hamilton Acoustical, Inc. 0 }Q 7, A.G. McKinney Co. ❑ )c A" Mowery Painting ❑ }O A & J Millworks ❑ p Todd's Home Repair & Remodeling ❑ )t 1. J.R.'s Landscaping X �2. Roche Newton & Company X 0" JJ3. Advanced Electric X n 5 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder And Attached to Bid Submittal the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been �dviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, mish valid insurance certipc he City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. gnature) Jim D. Hunter Contractor (Print) f CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Hunter Construction Company (Print or Type ) ,CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: P.C. Box 2587 Lubbock, Texas 79408 PM Name of Agent/Broker: Gallagher Inwest p-+ Address of Agent/Broker: P.C. Box 53910 "".ity/State/Zip: Lubbock, Texas 79453 Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 806 ) 78- ,—� 9p;8 Date: September 19, 2001 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR r6lf the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, 'l nlease contact the Purchasina Manaaer for the Citv of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. •,BID #226-01/RS - BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION 6 6� rj„s�s i 1 INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST P.O. Box 85563, San Diego, CA 92186-5563 BID OR PROPOSAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY . (hereinafter called the Principal), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of California, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of TEXAS as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the obligee) in the just and full SUM Of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID---- Dollars ($ ------(5%)---"""'''") lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, the above bound Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit to the obligee a bid or proposal dated SEPTEMBER 19, 2001 for BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION BID #226-01/RS in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefor. NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, neither Principal nor Surety shall be bound hereunder unless Obligee prior to execution of the final contract shall furnish evidence satisfactory to Principal and Surety that financing has been firmly committed to cover the entire cost of the project. Signed, sealed and dated: SEPTEMBER 19, 2001 P,#-ncinal (Seal) �• % J' D. Hunter, President INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST by ` KEVIN J. r Attorney -in- Fact �' ICWTX 409 (06192) W a m 0" No. 0001740 ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of California, The Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies"), do hereby appoint KEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, MIKE HENTHORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. v SEAL e, ,00 O John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego SS. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum and John H. Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. Witness my hand and official seal. NORMA PORTER COMM: 1257540 CAf NOTARY PUBLJC-CALIFORMLIFORNIA N SAN Expires My SANcommissionDIEQ CExpires MARCH 19, 2004 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions Avere duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 19 t h day of S p a t emb e r 2001 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1111 and ask for the Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached. For information or filing claims, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350-2400. go 'P"° Sep-13-01 07.20am From -CITY OF LUBBOCK-PURCHASING 9061152164 T-533 P.02/03 F-114 P, SECTION 00900 ADDENDA ADDENDUM NUMBER ONE ISSUE DATE: SEPTEMBER 12, 2001 t BILL MCALISTER PARK LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID DATE: SEPTEMBER 19, 2001 ISSUED BY: Schrickel Rollins and Assoc., Inc. ! Chapman Harvey Architects 1. This addendum modifies and extends the requirements of the plans and/or the project manual for the above referenced project, dated August 27, 2001. 2. Staple this addendum to the inside of the rear cover of the 8'/:"x11' project manual. 3. Mark all items notated to be marked on the plan sheets and specification pages. 4. Note receipt of all addenda on the line provided in the Bid Proposal. �^^ PROJECT MANUAL BID SUBMITTAL 1. Page 3: Change the amount of Liquidated Damages to the sum of $300 (Three Hundred Dollars) per day. SECTION 02510 —FLEXIBLE BASE 1. 2,01 MATERIALS: Delete the first sentence in its entirety. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS s. SHEET 2 — SITE PLAN 1. Three flagpoles are required, one per field. SHEET 7 — CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT "13" 1. The entire parking lot shall be constructed of 8" Flexible Base. No striping is required. 2. Detail 1 — Concrete Curb and Gutter: Change the overall dimension from 30" to 24" SHEET 10 — DETAILS 1. Detail 3 — Accessible Parking Space: Delete the following detail reference, " 4" Asphalt on" SHEET U1— UTILITY LAYOUT 1. Add the following note: "Water and Sanitary Sewer Mainline Service in the public Right of Way will be provided by the City of Lubbock. Construction is planned to be completed by December 15, 2001. SHEET 1-1 — IRRIGATION PLAN 1. IRRIGATION LEGEND a. Pop-up spray heads shall be Rainbird 1 B04 prs 4" pop -ups. b. Change the flow rate on Toro 640 spray rotors with No. 40 nozzle to 6.7 gpm. 2. Some valves and mainlines are intentionally oversized. The contractor shall install the sizes 4219 �._Z Sep-13-01 07:28am From -CITY OF LUBBOCK-PURCHASING 8067752164 T-533 P.03/03 F-TT4 indicated on the plans as a minimum. 3. Some of the valves are labeled incorrectly. New numbers will be assigned at a later date. Each valve shall be wired to a separate station on the controller. SHEET 1-2 — IRRIGATION PLAN 1. The booster pump location shall be changed to directly south of the transformer and controllers. Main lines shall be rerouted accordingly. 2. Add the following note: "The contractor shall supply eight (8) Four (4") inches isolation valves on the main line. The locations shall be selected by the owner." SHEET 1-3 — IRRIGATION DETAILS 1. POP-UP RISER ASSEMBLY DETAIL: Delete the swing joint. Add, in its place, a cut-off nipple sized to match the pop-up head. 2. MOISTURE SENSOR DETAIL: Delete the detail in its entirety. 3. GEAR DRIVEN ROTOR DETAIL: Pipe and fittings size shall match the rotor inlet size. 4. QUICK -COUPLING VALVE DETAIL: Pipe and fittings shall be minimum one (1') inch. S. PUMP STATION DETAIL a. Add the following note, "Contractor shall provide a five inch thick concrete pad, ten (10') feet long by eight (8') feet wide. The pump station shall be centered in the pad." b. The pump station shall be equipped with a pressure sensing circuit for low inlet pressure shut down, set at 10 psi, with manual reset. END OF ADDENDUM NO, ONE •214 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. 184 4516 F STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE .M (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST �. (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE MILLION THREE HUNDRED FIFTYTHOUSAND SEVEN HUNDRED EIGHTY SEVEN AND NO/100------------ Dollars ($1,350,787.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 11TH day of OCTOBER , 2001 , to BID #226-01/RS -BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent 0M as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021 (a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 15TH day of OCTOBER , Y001 INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST HUNT CONST 1�.N/OMPANY Surety Print' al J)hT 4 / * By: By. ^-fix EVIN J. DU , Attorney -In -Fact (Title) (Title) By: (Title) Im am r.Aa The undersigned surety company represents that it Is duly qualified to do business In Texas, and hereby designates KEVIN J. DUNN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST _ Surety r ... * By: T�- KE IN J. DU. Attorney -irk -Fact Approved as to Form City of Lubbock , ` — OM By: Cit Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. P" 0" 0 Mwi No. 0001740 r r ii ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of California, The Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies', do hereby appoint ]KEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCR, MIKE HENTHORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI _ their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. SEAL � ea �, 11. t0► 9bmA � Di I John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego } ss. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST _ THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum and John H. Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. Witness my hand and official seal. TIORMA.PORTER COMM. #i2a75/Ii7 �. NOTARY PUBLIC-CALIFORNIA (, A y§ADtEGO, GOUN1 MI. g 1.3 E0 s�on.Expires. MJ'43G i.10, 2004 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 15 t h day off t o b e r 2001 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1111 and ask for the Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached. For information or filing claims, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350-2400. IMPORTANT NOTICE 7o obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain .� information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. No Text 0 Bond No. 184 45 16 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE MILLION THREE HUNDRED FIFTY THOUSAND SEVEN HUNDRED EIGHTY SEVEN AND NO/100------------ "'!"" Dollars ($ 1,350,787.00 )lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 11TH day of OCTOBER , 2001 , to BID #226-011RS - BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond Is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021 (a) of the Texas Governm9nt Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same,exfent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 15TH day of� OCTOBER 2001 INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST Surety n ow *By; et KEVIN J. DUNN, Attorney -In -Fact By: 0" (Title) (Title) P* The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby ., designates KEVIN J. DUNN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST am Approved as to form: City of Lubbock By: Cit Attorney Surety *By:_� KEVIN J. DUN'V Attorney -In -Fact * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing MR that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 0 ii ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE, PRESENTS That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of California, The Insurance Company, m Explorer p pany, a Corporation duly organized' under the laws of the State. of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies'D, do hereby appoinf EEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, MIKE HENTHORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI their hue and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. `oolAPARi, 1001i rr oQ�`oavo14r—y°� e r SEAL c) 0 Gtirotwt�►' �4'l A�� � John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego } ss. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum and John H. Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. _ Witness my hand and official seal. NORMA.POATER " COMM.ARYPU#12ai54o NOTARY PUBLIC-CAi1)=OiiNIA A SANDiEGO,COUNTY G4��Jr12� Nty Cnr�mn Expires NAAA t-1 rssrbT9; 2M4 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attomey appointing the person(s) named as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying. CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in full force.__ IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 15th dayof _ October 2001 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-11,11 and ask for the ,Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attomey Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached. For information or filing claims, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350=2400. " ow 0 IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, .rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 ''ou may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a disputer concerning ' your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. No Text ACORD,. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DD(M 10/15/2001 PRODUCER (806) 785-1988 FAX (806) 785-2155 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Gallagher Inwest ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR P. 0. Box 53910 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Lubbock, Texas 79453 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE jo-..,INSURED Hunter Construction Company INSURER A: Mid -Continent Casualty Company P.o. Box 2587 INSURERB: Fireman's Fund Co. Mutual(Myron Steves) Lubbock, TX 79408 INSURERC: General Star Indemnity(larret) op INSURERD: Texas Work Comp. Fund INSURER E: Fi remans Fund (McGee) COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING .e ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MM/DD/YY POLICY EXPIRATION DATE MM/DD LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY 04GLS1694 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 100,000 CLAIMS MADE I A I OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 A PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 r GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY JECPRO-T LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO BA6400396 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 B ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS X BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ X BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ X PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGG $ L�ANY AUTO $ EXCESS LIABILITY IXG376037 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ IC $ $ DEDUCTIBLE X RETENTION $ 10 1 000 $ e+. D WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY SF426616 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 X TORY LIMITS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE _ $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 uIIRders' Risk 197700341 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 $3,000,000 Per 7obsite E $1,000 Deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSlVEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS roject: Bill McAlister Park Construction ►dditional Insured & Waiver of Subrogation included on General Liability & Auto policies in favor of ertificate holder as required by written contract. Waiver of Subrogation included on Work Comp. olicy in favor of certificate holder as required by written contract. CERTIFICATE HOLDER City of Lubbock PO Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79457 ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Q �_ Ron Stroman. CIC/ASG FAX: (806)77S-2164 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: A••a (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and r (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends *+ during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and. stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: ,•. 2 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes .persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 3 No Text I 0 CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 11" DAY OF OCTOBER by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY of the CITY OF LUBBOCK, COUNT Y OF LUBBOCK and the STATE OF TEXAS hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #226-011RS - BILL MCALISTER PARK CONSTRUCTION - $1,350,787.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the I on parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: Secretary APPROV D T TO CONTENT: Owner' Representative APPROVED AS TO FORM: I Ci y Attorney ATTEST: Cor rate Secretary CITY LUBBOCK, TEXAS WNE ) �AW lZi By: MAYOR l COMPLETE ADDRESS: Hunter Construction Company PO Box 2587 Lubbock, Texas 79408 r�+ r% GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 0 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative CRAIG WUENSCHE PARK DEVELOPMENT COORDINATOR, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed °" Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to .., herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. P" rR otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. ®w 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. """' 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be y conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) 2 r� 9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the �^* General Conditions. 9.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 10 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 11 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 11.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such "' notifications will be made. 112, NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION. CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB)' MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER,THAN: FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 1625 1311 Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: rshuffield@mail.ci.Iubbock.tx.us 12 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 12.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within ONE HUNDRED THIRTY (130) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed s issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 12.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 13 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the �• contract documents. 14 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute PM an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. r" 15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve I the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve ,., the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 16 GUARANTEES 16.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 16.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 16.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 16.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 17 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 18 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, P" supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. p., (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions - of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. �* In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America, Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." �e No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall r� comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment. and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, u .MR are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. ., 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of can or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in Poo conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and t, shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury Heavy Equipment Endorsement B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, 10 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit, ^* to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job m ! and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100%% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $1,000,000.00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. 1. Definitions: ., Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project -includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor rm Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a s"* project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and r"+ 8 (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate w of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the ' Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance 9 O n MR M" (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: 0) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that ali employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the �* Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage rya Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so ,.,. the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; *+ 10 (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. r" 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 12 PIN a.: 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. P- 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. �+ If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $0 LZERO PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial *^ completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that �„ 13 0 when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. A 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause curing the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated �* to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and 14 e employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. .N 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. u 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be •. retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's �. Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. """44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT "M 15 The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. d, ; 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the ? amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the '"" 16 written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the p®, contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the ems. Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to �r• 17 n the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law; equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. i 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. °" 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special .conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus ,�, 18 materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, ►* Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) z. days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. �^* In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (1) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 19 eRae CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS OWN P" PON RE: RESOLUTION NO. 6262, ITEM NO. 39, APRIL 8, 1999 EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate Acoustical Ceiling Installer 11.50 Air Conditioner Installer 12.50 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper 6.25 Asbestos Worker 9.00 Asbestos Supervisor 12.50 Bricklayer 12.50 Bricklayer -Helper 7.00 Carpenter 11.00 e-= Carpenter -Helper 7.00 Cement Finisher 8.00 Drywall Hanger 11.00 Electrician 13.75 Electrician -Helper 7.00 Equipment Operator -Heavy 9.50 Equipment Operator -Light 8.50 - Floor Installer 9,50 Glazier 10.50 Insulator-Piping/Boiler 11.50 Insulator -Helper 7.00 Iron Worker 11.00 Laborer -General 6.00 Mortar Mixer 6.00 Painter 9.50 Plumber 12.50 Plumber -Helper 7.00 Roofer 9.00 Roofer -Helper 7.00 Sheet Metal Worker 10.00 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper 7.00 Welder -Certified 11.00 m +�* 1 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 Asphalt Shoveler 6.00 Concrete Finisher 8.00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7.00 Electrician 12.00 Flagger 6.00 Form Setter 7.00 Form Setter -Helper 6.25 Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 8.00 Mechanic -Helper 7.00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.75 Bulldozer 8.00 Concrete Paving Machine 7.75 Front End Loader 7.25 Heavy Equipment Operator 8.00 Light Equipment Operator 7.25 Motor Grader Operator 9.50 Roller 6.75 Scraper 7.25 Tractor 7.25 Truck Driver -Light 6.50 Truck Driver -Heavy 7.00 2 EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the fair Labor Standards Act. C SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT MANUAL Bill McAlister Park City of Lubbock, Texas August 27, 2001 SRA Job No. 4219 Bid No. Schrickel, Rollins and Associates, Inc. Engineering • Landscape Architecture • Planning 1161 Corporate Drive West • Suite 200 • Arlington, Texas 76006 (817) 649-3216/Metro 640-8212/FAX (817) 649-7646 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 612 Broadway Lubbock, Texas 79401 (806) 749-1154/Fax (806) 749-1866 n 00002 - CERTIFICATION ooa>\OlpQ `' 0 °e eD 44, j VICTOR .W:.... ......... . 6 3 6 p .� 8 7 MR k PE OF l 1 CF OF s j, JIMMY MAY CHARLES A. LUSHER �-o 30577 :. 6 e* The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners, P.O. Box 12337, Austin, Texas 78711-2337 or333 Guadalupe, Suite 2-350, Austin, Texas 78701-3942, (512) 305-9000, has jurisdiction over individuals licensed under the Landscape Architects Registration Law, Texas Civil Statutes, Article 249c, and the Architects Registration Law, Article 249a, Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes. PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00001 - Title Paqe 00002 - Certification Page 00003 - Table of Contents BIDDING ADMINISTRATION 00200 - Geotechnical Data Available to Bidders CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00822 - Temporary Erosion, Sediment and Water Pollution Control DIVISION 1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 01010 - Summary of the Work 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services 01510 - Temporary Utilities and Facilities 01532 - Tree Protection 01580 - Project Signs 01630 - Substitutions and Product Options 01670 - Systems Demonstrations 01700 - Contract Closeout 01710 - Cleaning Up DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02100 - Site Preparation 02210 - Earthwork and Topsoil Compost 02223 - Excavation, Grading, and Subgrade Preparation (Buildings) 02230 - Infield Surfacing 02510 - Flexible Base 02665 - Water Supply System 02675 - Water Meter Installations 02685 - Sanitary Sewer 02700 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving 4219 a2830 Galvanized Chain Link Fencing 02900 - Tree Planting 02930 - Turfgrass Planting ®„* 02970 - Irrigation System DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 - Concrete Work DIVISION 4 - MASONRY `^ 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 - Structural Steel 05313 - Metal Floor Deck 05500 - Metal Fabrications DIVISION - 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06125 - Wood Deck 06400 - Architectural Millwork DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07105 - Dampproofing and Waterproofing 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation .� 07465 - Preformed Metal Siding 07610 - Sheet Metal Roofing 07900 - Joint Sealers 07920 - Caulking and Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08115 - Steel Doors and Frames 08410 - Aluminum Windows 08700 - Finish Hardware 08800 - Glazing e^+ DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09900 - Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10155 - Toilet Compartment 10350 - Flagpole �., 10440 - Signs 10522 - Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10800 - Toilet Accessories .A, ' 4219 - P" DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13122 - Shade Cloth DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions 15020 - Testing 15060 - Piping 15250 - Insulation 15400 - Plumbing 15650 - Air Conditioning 15804 - Ventilating 15840 - Ductwork 15870 - Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 - General Electrical Provisions 16110 - Raceways 16120 - Conductors 16130 - Boxes and Fittings 16133 - Cabinets 16134 - Panelboards 16140 - Wiring Devices 16170 - Switches and Fuses 16450 - Grounding 16500 - Lighting r*1 M 4 t 4219 1 2. 3 4 4219 pwt SECTION 00200 GEOTECHNICAL DATA AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS INVESTIGATION: A. An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the site was authorized by the Owner, and these investigations were made by Mid -Tex Engineering & Testing, LLC. REPORTS: A. Logs of test borings are bound herein for information only. B. The complete text of the subsurface investigation report may be examined by qualified Bidders in the office of the Architect/Engineer. INTERPRETATION: A. Bidders are expected to examine the site and the subsurface investigation reports and then decide for themselves the character of the materials to be encountered. B. The Owner and Architect/Engineer disclaim any responsibility for the accuracy, true location and extent of the soils investigation that has been prepared by others. They further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of that data by Bidders, as in projecting soil -bearing values, rock profiles, soil stability and the presence, level and extent of underground water. Refer also to Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions. No Text PROPOSED PARK IMPROVEMENTS LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUMMARY OF CLASSIFICATION TESTS Boring No, Depth... ft. Liquid Limit % Plasticity Index % % Passing 200 Mesh Sieve % : ` ' = Matenai Des�nption B-1 0.0-2.0 34 19 57 Brown Clayey Sand B-1 2.0-3.0 28 13 56 Tan Sandy Caliche B-3 0.0-2.0 30 16 48 Brown Clayey Sand PLATE 11 MID-TEX ENGINEERING cSt TESTING, LLC. EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS AND -- TERMS USED ON BORING LOGS CAo +, MONITOR WELL o .r.a o cam.. rra aF DIAGRAM im S m a; Ca MATERIAL DESCRIPTION a U. Lockingrn ai Cap tom) T.O.C. Undisturbed Push Tube Semple Cement j +3S Pocket Penetrometer Test GroutI -- Split Spoon Sample Bcrrtoniie y 1.0 PID. IFF. OVA. FiD T.O.S. I Standard Penetration Blow Count NX—Size Core So pie Pads Sand - PVC Cap T T water Erreoeaten:d Water Level Encountered During 'VF DnIling = Stacie urwet StabiIized Water Level ( ) UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS AND DIVISIONS Well —Graded Grovels. Gravel Sand Mixtures (GW) Poorly —Graded Sands. Gravelly Sands (SP) MI. Organic Sifts and Organic Sit) Clays of Low Plasticity (OL) � Poorly—Graded Craveie, Grard Sand Mixtures (CP) Silty Sands. Poorly —Graded. Sand—Sttt 1.lixtures (SM) InorganOlatomaic ic Silts. Micaceaus or Silty SoilsLIus Fine Sandy or .., Silty Gravel. Gravel lit Sand—Sfixtures (GM) i�L•�d Clayey Sands. Poorly -Graded. Sand —Clay Mixtures (SC) Inorganic Clays of Hi h Plasticity. Fat pays (CH) LJ Clayey Gravels. Gravel —Sand —Clay Mixtures (CC) Wei —Graded Sands. GravellyMedium Sands (SW) Inorganic Silts and Very Fine Sands.so ( or Clam' Fine Lai h+a�Clays of Lew to Sandy or Plasticity gayslly. , %.'�' Organic Jaya of Medium to Sllts (0 ) Caliche and Other Impervious Layer (HP) Loan Clays BEDROCZK SYMBOLS c 00 Conglomerate (CCL) 00 ^- ti Shale (Sh) ' Sandstone (SS) �,'' Weathered Shale (WS) Limestone (LS) -,- . .::Y :: Sandy Shale (SSh) ,MISCELLANEOUS SYMBOLS Asphaltic Concrete (HMAC) : o.:: Cement Grout (CLM .o The LOG of BORING is a representation location and within the depth explored. The of the subsurface material at specific boring transition between strata may be gradual and variations in material types and depths between borings can be expected. Water level observations rVoresent those conditions at the time of exploration and may very with time and location of site. Sholey Limestone (Sh LS) Dolomite (DOL) Sentonite (BENT) SOIL COLOR CLASSIFI CATI O N Determined by MUNSELL SOIL COLOR CHARTS 1990 E33MON REVISED F_ B-1 Bill McAlister Park Brownfield Highway Lubbock, Texas Project Number MT-2194 Drill Rig Failing 1500 Geologist E. Reynolds Ground Elevation 100.0 Feet Date Drilled 6/28/01 Total Depth of Borehole 25.0 Feet Borehole Diameter 5.0 Inches Depth to Water Dry o Description 0 Completion C7 G1 rig � C� Brown Clayey Sand H.P. 4.5 911 ° H.P. 4.5 o Tan Sandy Caliche o�•o�: 'q oq o. o. SPT 12-17-17 •ri4•tio• 5 GS. •.O ..4 o �' -CJ, CJ •ST, D. o. aq c•q �. a 'C, •nA•go• SPT 26-31-31 c pa,oa, qbp/{ � 4• 10 nA•go• O• cs 0•�gll a' o aq'"a d op �d 100=7" "•o�•o�' 15 TCP ° °` Tan Silty Sand •v 4 • Tan Sand Caliche Y U/-q.4 o'%O•gQ �•G q: a: 20 TCP 100=2.5 9-0 9: Tan Silty Sand w/thin Sandstone layers �o° ° 100=6" 25 TCP 30 35 MID-TEX ENGINEERING & TESTING, LLC. Page I POW" POW Bill McAlister Park Project Number MT-2194 —Geologist E. Reynolds —Date Drilled 6/28/01 Borehole Diameter 5.0 Inches ap Description X Brown Clayey Sand Tan Sandy 1. : ` 51 :6 Tan Silty Sand Tan Sandy Light Red Sand B-2 Brownfield Highway Lubbock, Texas Drill Rig Failing 1500 Ground Elevation 100.0 Feet Total Depth of Borehole 25.0 Feet Depj;h to Water 7d C Completion H.P. 4.5 H.P. 4.5 SPT 3-6-10 511 SPT 5-5-8 10 SPT 10-20-30 15 SPT 16-21-28 20 SPT 20-29-31 25 ON B-3 Bill McAlister Park Brownfield Highway Lubbock, Texas Project Number MT-2194 Drill Rig Failing 1500 Geologist E. Reynolds Ground Elevation 100.0 Feet Date Drilled 6/28/01 Total Depth of Borehole 25.0 Feet Borehole Diameter 5.0 Inches Depth to Water Dry aq Description 0 Completion o�+» a. Cd w G r V Q C/1 Brown Clayey Sand H.P. 4.5 H.P. 4.5 SPT 7-8-10 da•vA• Light Tan Sandy Caliche Q' U" U • 5 •O o•C7 o• 4•vo•r�o• G'a •'C a .A o- aq•czA- a.o�a a•n o •n A d'•d SPT 11-14-I4 ri4•no. q.Ob�CJ. •C2c•C1'o• 10 Q •OQ'O.U• Light Brown Sand SPT 2-2-4 d pA�.a 15 o•do•vo• Tan Caliche 0.04.0� :ao•vo• �•.V, o•1J, a• SPT 14-19-31 o d d� n� Light Tan Sandy Caliche 4.oao? ¢' a Q�'A/ 20 Q�• aa�o�o ilo•C7c• SPT 18-28-37 25 30 35 MID-TEX ENGINEERING & TESTING, LLC. Page I B-4 Bill McAlister Park Brownfield Highway Lubbock, Texas Project Number MT-2194 Drill Rig Failing 1500 Geologist E. Reynolds Ground Elevation 100.0 Feet Date Drilled 6/28/01 Total Depth of Borehole 25.0 Feet Borehole Diameter 5.0 Inches Depth to Water Dry to a Description 0 Completion U C* Q 04-9 Q;' Brown Clayey Sand J[H.PF.4�.5 g:'j Tan Sandy Caliche Light Red Silty Sand -1 a e-0 Tan Silty Sand w/caliche particles SPT 10-12-12 d4 no• Tan Sandy Caliche •C1.on•Cl.o• 10 U'OU'O• ,U' •Cl,o•C1o• p 9 Tan Silty Sand 9:0: 9: SPT 8-9-9 n 9: 9 o:e 9' 15 6 � SPT 11-20-24 Po .: 20 9: 9A o: 100=5.5" Tan Caliche "•GoGc• 25 TCP 30 35 MID-TEX ENGINEERING & TESTING, LLC. Page 1 I B-5 Bill McAlister Park Brownfield Highway Lubbock, Texas Project Number MT-2194 Drill Fig Failing 1500 Geologist E. Reynolds Ground Elevation 100.0 Feet Date Drilled 6/28/01 Total Depth of Borehole 5.0 Feet Borehole Diameter 5.0 Inches Depth to Water Dry CW Description 0 Completion Brown Clayey Sand H.P. 4.5 H.P. 4.5 Brown Clayey Sand w/Caliche 5 Tan Sand w/Caliche 10- 15- -20- -25- -30- -35 F -A MID-TEX ENGINEERING & TESTING,, LLC. Page I I N lzo SECTION 00822 TEMPORARY EROSION, SEDIMENT AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: This item shall consist of temporary soil erosion sediment and water pollution control measures deemed necessary by the Architect/Engineer for duration of the contract. The temporary measures shall include dikes, dams, berms, sediment basins, fiber mats, jute netting, temporary seeding, straw mulch, asphalt mulch, plastic liners, rubble liners, baled -hay retards, dikes, slope drains and other devices typically used to prevent erosion. 1.02 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: The`Architect/Engineer has the authority to define erodible earth and the authority to limit the surface area of erodible -earth material. The Contractor will be required to incorporate temporary pollution control measures to prevent or correct erosion that may develop during construction. All labor, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work will not be paid for directly but shall be considered subsidiary work to the various items included in the contract. 1.03 1.04 4219 sin A. Waste or disposal areas and construction roads shall be located and constructed in a manner that will minimize the amount of sediment entering public streets and storm sewer systems. B. All streets shall be cleared as soon as practicable of falsework, piling, debris or other obstruction placed during construction operations that are not a part of the finished work. C. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions to prevent pollution with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride or other harmful materials. He shall conduct and schedule his operations so as to avoid or minimize siltation of streams, storm sewer lines, and adjacent streets. Construction of perimeter swales and straw bale check dams are a temporary measure to prevent sediment and debris from leaving the site. The Contractor is responsible for achieving the proposed grades as shown on the grading plan. Location of high points, center lines of perimeter swales and outfalls are approximate. During construction, swales shall be adjusted in the field as necessary to allow positive drainage in the swale and prevent sediment and debris from leaving the construction site. END OF SECTION TEMPORARY EROSION, SEDIMENT AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL 00822 - 1 r.7- SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Base Bid: The work to be included in the Base Bid consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with or properly incidental to the ^" construction of the Bill McAlister Park. Items to be constructed include, but are not limited to, removal/demolition items, storage and protection of designated items, site preparation, earthwork, fencing, concrete construction, irrigation system, turf and tree plantings, erosion control, utility services, concession stand, restrooms, and pavilion. B. Alternate Bid Items: The work to be included as a part of the Alternate Bids consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with or �^* properly incidental to the construction of Work in the Base Bid. 1.02 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Owner will be responsible for the following construction items to be done by City forces or by separate contract: 1. Primary electrical powerand transformers (by agreement between Ownerand power company). 2. Ballfield lighting system. 3. Purchase, assembly and placement of bleachers. 1.03 OWNER'S EXPECTATION OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. The Owner will closely examine the qualifications and records of Bidders who wish to become the Successful Bidder for this project. The Owner will weigh the bids and the qualifications in their decision of whom to select to do the work. Any Bidder with serious intent of becoming the Successful Bidder must prove to the satisfaction of the Owner that they have an experience record of having successfully completed projects similar in nature, size, schedule, and complexity. B. Each Bidder must demonstrate the competence and experience of his own forces and that of the subcontractors. Each Bidder must submit WITH THE BID the required list of subcontractors and Contractors Qualification Statement. Failure to submit the list may cause disqualification. C. The City requests that bidders without the necessary qualifications not submit bids, as they will be disqualified or passed over for consideration of qualified bidders. 1.04 COMPLETION DATES FOR PHASES OF THE WORK 4219 A. The Successful Bidder/Contractor agrees to begin work within the stipulated time from the date of the written work order or notice to proceed. If a Successful Bidder is selected by the Owner, the award of contract is expected to occur on or about September 15, 2001, and the notice to proceed is expected to be issued on or about October 1, 2001. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 I 1.05 4219 B. The following date is for the substantial completion of Work at the park site in the Contract: March 15, 2002, for completion of the Work in the Contract. C. Failure to meet the completion date will cause separate liquidated damages to be assessed for each day the construction is incomplete and delayed at a particular park site. Refer to the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. IMPORTANCE OF TIMELY COMPLETION OF THE WORK IN THE CONTRACT: SCHEDULE AND WORK A. As the final phase of Work on the park sites, all of the designated athletic fields must be completely planted by the Contractor with the specified turfgrass and be accepted in the satisfactory condition of "uniform establishment' by the Owner on or before March 15, 2001. Due to the importance to the Owner of having established turfgrass on all of the athletic fields during the spring of 2002, the Contractor must complete the Work in its entirety on orbefore April 1, 2002. At that time, the Owner intends to open the park for public use. B. The Work includes, but is not limited to, items of Work described below. Areas in which various portions of the Work are located are graphically depicted on the plan sheets. It is understood that Work in addition to these items may also be necessary to accomplish the complete Contract. Site Work • Demolition and removal of designated items. • Removal, transportation, storage and protection of designated items. • Site preparation. • Earthwork, including topsoil preparations and fine grading for the athletic fields. • Galvanized fence on the baseball fields. • Concrete paving and bleacher pads. • Infield surfacing material installation. • Turfgrass irrigation system and controls, fully tested and operational. • The specified turfgrass, planted and established to a "uniform stand" to the satisfaction of the Owner. • Erosion control measures. • Irrigation mains and ancillary items. • All related and ancillary items necessary to utilize and operate the irrigation water supply system and the turfgrass irrigation systems serving the athletic fields and other areas. • Concession stand. • Restroom buildings. • Pavilion • Press boxes. • Water supply lines. • Flexible base parking lot. C. Bidders are advised that it is a requirement of this Contract to have the irrigation -water supply system and the turfgrass irrigation system fully tested and fully operational to the Owner's satisfaction two calendar weeks prior to planting the turfgrass. D. Bidders are advised that it is a requirement of this Contract that the planting of the turfgrass can proceed onlyefterthe irrigation system and fine grading record drawings have been approved by the Owner's representative. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 E. The Owner will be responsible for the establishment and maintenance of the turfgrass after it is completely and properly planted and established to a "uniform stand." However, the Contractor will be responsible for the maintenance of all of the irrigation system and all of the irrigation -water supply system with regard to installation, materials and workmanship throughout the warranty period of the entire Contract. This includes unforeseen settlement of trenches and replanting that may become necessary. 1. Within 24 hours of notification, any repairs, replacements or corrections of deficiencies k in the described systems (which are related to installation, materials or workmanship) will be immediately performed and completed by the Contractor so that the Owner will not experience damages, delays or losses of efficiency in the ability to irrigate and maintain the planted turfgrass in the critical establishment period which is expected to occur in typical mid -summer climatic conditions of drought and high temperatures. 2. Should the Contractor fail to immediately perform appropriate repairs, replacements or corrections in the described systems, and thereby cause the Owner to be unable to successfully irrigate, and maintain the established turfgrass, the Contractor will be charged with the costs for Work the Owner must accomplish in order to successfully irrigate, reestablish and maintain the turfgrass. F. Items which are damaged or which require repairs or adjustments as a result of the Owner's "^ maintenance operations will be the responsibility of the Owner. G. The Contractor will cooperate with the Owner to maintain a clear access to each athletic field that the Owner is responsible to maintain. H. Failure of the Contractor to complete the Work in the Contract by April 1, 2002, will result in liquidated damages as stipulated in this Agreement. END OF SECTION .•a SUMMARY OF WORK 4219 01010 - 3 SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to General Conditions. B. Submit to the Architect/Engineer shop drawings, product data, and samples required by specification sections. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepared by a qualified detailer. B. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on Contract Documents. C. Shop Drawings shall be submitted one to clarify, amplify, or revise information shown or called for in the contract documents. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: 1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to the work. 2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information specifically applicable to the work. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations, and other standard descriptive data: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. 2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 1.04 SAMPLES A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of product or material, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color samples. B. Field Samples and Mock-ups: 1. Erect at project site at location acceptable to Architect/Engineer. 2. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required in finish work. 1.05 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Submit shop drawing and product data as soon as practicable after award of contract but not +* later than 30 days before dates reviewed submittals will be needed. B. Submit all office samples as soon as practicable but not later than [60] days after award of contract in order to facilitate color selections and coordination of the various materials. Final color selections and release of shop drawings contingent upon color selection will not be made until all office samples have been submitted, coordinated, and approved. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4219 01340 - 1 C. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit 5 prints only of each shop drawing, unless otherwise indicated. ns 2. Product Data: Submit 5 copies of product data. 3. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section, minimum of three samples for each item. D. Submittals shall include: 1. Date and revision dates. 2. Project title and number. rm 3. Names of Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer. 4. Identification of product or material and specification section number. 5. Relation to adjacent structure, materials or other critical features. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Applicable reference standards. 8. A blank space 4" x 6" for Architect/Engineer's stamp. 9. Other pertinent data required by specifications. ,., 10. Identification of variation from contract documents. 11. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements, compliance with contract documents, and coordination with requirements of the work. W. Note: Absence of the Contractor's stamp shall constitute grounds for rejection of the submittal until such time as the submittal has been processed in accordance with this requirement. 1.06 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Resubmission: Make corrections and changes in submittals required by Architect/Engineer and resubmit until approved. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Revise initial drawings and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other than those requested by Architect/Engineer. C. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as specified for initial submittal. 1.07 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW A. Distribute reviewed copies of shop drawings and product data which carry Arch itect/Engineer's stamp as follows: 1. Job Site File. 2. Record Documents File. 3. Other affected contractors. 4. Subcontractors. 5. Supplier or Fabricator. Arch itect/Engineer will retain three (3) copies: one for his file, one for his consultants, and one for the owner. END OF SECTION p" SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4219 01340 - 2 SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified testing of work and materials at the Project Site. 1. Independent Testing Lab must be acceptable to Owner. If Contractor proposes laboratory that is not acceptable to Owner, Contractor must propose another laboratory that is acceptable to Owner without additional cost to Owner, without reduced scope of testing services, and without increase to the Contract Completion Date. 2. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. 3. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. B. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified services and testing of work and materials at the point of manufacture or fabrication. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract: Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, order or approvals of public authorities. B. Respective sections of specifications: Certification of products. C. Each specification section listed: Laboratory test required, and standards for testing. 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR'S LABORATORY A. Meet"Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction." C. Authorized to operate in the State of Texas. D. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of i, National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum - of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. E. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards. b. Accepted values of natural physical constants. F. Employatesting laboratory with whom the Owner and Arch itect/Engineer have no objections. PR TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 4219 01410 - 1 1.04 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after due notice from Contractor. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction: 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect/Engineer, Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect/Engineer. F. Perform additional tests as required by Architect/Engineer or the Owner. 1.05 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 4. Stop the Work. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to manufacturer's operations. B. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required. C. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. D. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 4219 01410 - 2 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence. 1.07 PAYMENT FOR TESTING A. Initial Testing: 1. The Contractor shall pay for all initial services of the testing laboratory for initial testing as required by the Contract Documents and testing as the Owner deems necessary. B. Retesting: 1. When initial test indicates non-compliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent retesting occasioned by the non-compliance shall be performed by the same testing agency, and costs thereof will be paid by the Contractor. C. Code Compliance Testing: 1. Inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances, or by plan approval authority, and made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of, and shall be paid for, by the Contractor and not borne by the Owner. D. Contractor's Convenience Testing: 1. Inspection ortesting performed exclusively forthe Contractor's convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. END OF SECTION TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 4219 01410 - 3 i PM SECTION 01610 TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities and facilities required for construction; remove on completion of Work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Summary of Work - Section 01010. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code. B. Comply with federal, state and local codes and regulations and with utility company requirements. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.01 FIELD OFFICE A. The Contractor shall furnish a weathertight job office with operative windows, provided with light and gas or electric heat when necessary, with smooth tables for using drawings and specifications and with approved means forfiling same and provide and pay for all necessary fuel and electrical energy. A complete set of all drawings and specifications shall be kept on the job at all times. This job office shall provide adequate separate space for the Owner's representative. Upon completion of the work, the office shall be removed from the premises. k. The Contractor shall examine the site plan before locating the office and shall not place it within five (5') feet of any underground lines. Owner's approval is required on final location of field office. 2.02 STORAGE SHEDS �* A. The Contractor may provide on the premises at convenient locations with respect to building construction areas, suitable watertight storage sheds for storage of materials, equipment, and tools which might be damaged by exposure to the weather, and shall maintain same in good condition, and shall remove same when no longer needed, or shall relocate same from time to time where preliminary location might interfere with subsequent work. 2.03 FENCING A. The Contractor may provide job shack and storage fencing a minimum of six (6') feet in height, with four-by-four (4'V")inch posts or two and one-half (2-1/2") inch galvanized posts spaced ten (10') feet on center, well -braced, and having hog wire or two (2") inch diamond Neil mesh chain link fabric. The fence will be complete with sliding or swinging gates with necessary hardware and padlock. Provide two (2) keys for the Owner's use. Remove fencing and fill posts holes upon completion of work. All fencing shall be provided with fire gates as ,.,. necessary for emergency access. `P" TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES 4219 01510 - 1 0 r_ w e*. B. The existing trees within the storage areas and any trees endangered by access -ways to above must be protected by the General Contractor with a five (5) foot high wire mesh fence. The fence shall be placed at the drip line of all trees to remain. All trees shall be protected from damage and shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. The Contractor shall replace any trees or shrubs destroyed by the construction operations, at the Contractor's expense. Refer to Section 01532 - TREE PROTECTION. 2.04 POWER AND LIGHT A. The Contractor shall obtain and have installed a temporary power service line to a point convenient for and available to all trades, including mechanical and other contractors. The cost of current used shall be paid by the Contractor, and he may apportion the charge among the trades using the current in a manner agreed upon. B. The Contractor shall install temporary lighting to maintain illumination in all areas where work of any kind is being performed. Where practical, temporary lights shall be placed in the locations where the permanent lighting fixtures are to be installed. P" 2.05 SANITARY FACILITIES A. The General Contractor shall provide adequate toilet facilities for the use of all persons employed on the job. He shall post notices, take such precautions as may be necessary, remove any refuse deposited in or about the buildings, and maintain the premises in a sanitary conditions. 2.06 WATER A. The Owner will permit the Contractor to use existing water facilities and water at no cost; however, any extension or alteration to the system will be at the expense of the Contractor if approved by the Owner. 2.07 STORAGE AND STOCKPILE OF EXCAVATED DIRT A. All dirt excavated during the construction process shall be stockpiled as directed by the Owner and/or Engineer. 2.08 SCAFFOLDING A. Each contractor shall provide and install all scaffolding, ramps, platforms, rails, guards, stairs, and ladders necessary for the performance of the work. All safety standards, ordinances, codes, and insurance requirements must be met. All items shall be so constructed as to afford safety and protection to both craftsmen and their work and to the work of other contractors. 2.09 DE -WATERING A. Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be permitted to accumulate in excavations under or adjacent to any structures. Should such conditions develop, water and other fluids shall be controlled and disposed of by means of temporary pumps, piping, drain lines, ditches, dams, or other approved methods. 2.10 SHORING A. All temporary shoring required for the installation of work shall be included in this Contract and the General Contractor must assume all responsibility for this work and make good any damage caused by improper supports or failure of shoring in any respect. TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES 4219 01510 - 2 2.11 BARRICADES A. The Contractor shall erect and maintain sufficient barricades to protect adjacent structures, „® paving, lawns, etc., from damage by construction vehicles and operations. Barricades must also be erected where required to prevent injury to the public. 2.12 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND SAFETY A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic control and safety during construction. The Contractor shall meet all City requirements for public safety, barriers, and traffic control. The Contractor shall coordinate with the City of Lubbock during necessary street control. 2.13 LIFTING AND HOISTING A. The Contractor shall supply all hoists, lifts, cranes, towers, etc., as required for the handling of the various materials. Installation of all equipment shall meet all applicable safety requirements. 2.14 WATCHMAN A. The Contractor or subcontractor, at his own expense and option, shall employ a watchman at such time as he deems necessary to protect or attend his work. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all other security arrangements that he will require during the progress of the work. 2.15 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. When any temporary facility is no longer needed for the proper conduct of the work, the Contractor shall completely remove it from the project and shall repair or replace any r material, equipment, or finished surface damaged by doing so. 2.16 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide and maintain temporary fire protection during construction in accordance with requirements of the local Fire Protection Code. r� 2.17 PARKING FACILITIES A. Restrict parking of construction personnel vehicles to areas designated on Drawings or as directed by Owner. B. Do not allow parking on other existing paving areas used by Owner. C. Do not allow construction vehicle parking on completed new paving, except as otherwise approved by Owner. END OF SECTION e�. TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES 4219 01510 - 3 W SECTION 01532 TREE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: Protect trees and shrubs that are to remain in place from foliage, trunk, and root damage that may result from construction operations. Protect tree trunks as shown on the following pages. 1.02 FENCING DETAILS: Fencing details areshown on accompanying pages of this section fortemporary -• fencing for tree protection. 1.03 PROTECT SUCH TREES AND SHRUBS THAT ARE TO REMAIN FROM THE FOLLOWING DAMAGE: A. Compaction of root area by equipment or material storage. • B. Trunk damage by moving equipment, material storage, nailing, or bolting. C. Strangling by tying ropes or guy wires to trunks or large branches. D. Poisoning by pouring solvents, gas, paint, etc., on or around trees and roots. E. Cutting of roots by excavating, ditching, etc. F. Drought from failure to water or by cutting or changing normal drainage pattern past roots. G. Changes of soil pH factor by disposal of lime base material such as concrete, plaster, etc. H. Do not cut roots 1-1/2" in diameter or over. All excavation and earthwork within the drip line of trees will be done by hand. All pruning will be done by Owner. 1.04 DAMAGES -SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS: When trees other than those approved for removal are destroyed, killed, or badly damaged as a result of construction operations, the Contract sum will be reduced by the amount determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: D2 x 0.7854 x $20.00, where D is the diameter in inches of the trunk of each shade tree measured 1 12" above grade. END OF SECTION r" TREE PROTECTION 4219 01532 - 1 A"a a TYPICAL TREE PROTECTION FENCING TYR STEEL DRIVE e IN POSTS 8 NO I CLIMB FENCE MAY BE SQUARE AS INDICATED IN i .—•.—• • • e---•—e e 1 SITUATION "C. • • I 0 POSTS TO BE AT • • • • f APPROX. 8'O.C. d ZSTEEL DRIVE IN POST AND NON -CLIMB FENCE PAST DRIP LINE OF ALL TREES. TREE IN OPEN AREAS W/GRASS OR PLANTING POSTS TO BE APPROX. B'O.C. SEVERAL TREES IN OPEN AREAS W/GRASS OR PLANTS SITUATION "A" SITUATION "B" DRIVE IN POSTS N--;:� MOVABLE STEEL POSTS WITH NON - CLIMB FENCE FAST MOVE MV`CURB LINE DRIP LINE. FENCE POSTS OPENING IN MAY BE ROUND AS ONTO IMOVABLE POSTS PAVEMENT • INDICATED IN WHILE NON-CLIMBFENCAROUND SITUATION"A'. ON PAVBEYOND DRIP TREES POSTS TO BELINE71APPROX. B'O.C.rPAVED AREA` TREE IN CONCRETE OR PAVED AREAS TREE IN A TRAFFIC ISLAND OR PROJECTION SITUATION "C" SITUATION 'OD" DRIVE IN POSTS ROADWAY ROADWAY AND NON -CLIMB CURB LINE FENCE CURB LINE DRIVE IN POSTS 8 NON - CLIMB FENCE PAST DRIP GRASS OR !e ! LINE , POSTS TO BE PLANTING • APPRCS(. 8' O.C. e GRASS OR PLANTING WALKWAY " •fie--O TREE BETWEEN WALK AND ROAD - - TREE IN SOIL AREA IN CORNER SITUATION "E" SITUATION "F" ROADWAY CURB UNDER NO CONDITIONS WILL THE CONTRACTOR BE PERMITTED LINE IVE IN POSTS TO TRIM A TREE. ALL TRIMMINO MUST BE DONE BY GROUNDS GRASS ?' AND NON -CLIMB FENCE MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL. FENCING a POSTS MUST AT ALL TIMES BE KEPT A MINIMUM IN PLANTING % OF 3'-0" FROM TREE TRUNK. WALKWAY SEE STANDARDS SHEET FOR FENCING, FOR DETAILS OF - TREE PROTECTION FENCING. FENCING INSTALLED PAST DRIP LINE MUST BE FAR ENOUGH TO PROTECT LIMBS FROM TRUCKS AND MOVING MECHANICAL - EQUIPMENT. WHERE LOCATION OF TREE PRECLUDES ADAPTATIONS AS SHOWN AT SITUATIONS "D",'E',"F',a '0",CONTRACTOR WILL INSTALL TREE PROTECTION ASDIRECTED BY PROJECT ARCHITECT / ENGINEER. SITUATION "G" GENERAL NOTES: 01 sA+ SECTION 01580 PROJECT SIGNS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain project identification sign. B. Provide temporary on -site informational signs to identify key elements of construction facilities. C. Remove signs on completion of construction. D. Allow no other signs to be displayed [without owner's permission]. 1.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. One painted sign of size, lettering, and construction shown on drawing to be provided by Architect/Engineer. Locate on site as directed by Architect/Engineer. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS A. Painted signs with painted lettering, or standard products. 1. Size of signs and lettering: as required by regulatory agencies or as appropriate to usage. 2. Colors: As required by regulatory agencies, otherwise of uniform colors throughout Project. B. Erect at appropriate locations to provide required information. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign painter: Professional experience in type of work required. r B. Finishes and Painting: Adequate to resist weathering and fading for scheduled construction period. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: New, wood or metal, in sound condition, structurally adequate to work and suitable for specified finish. B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior softwood plywood with medium density overlay, standard large sizes to minimize joints. 1. Thickness: 3/" exterior grade AID face veneers. C. Paint: Exterior quality. 1. Use Bulletin colors for graphics. 2. Colors for structure, framing, sign surfaces and graphics: as selected by Architect. MW PROJECT SIGNS 4219 01580 - 1 I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. Paint exposed supports, framing and surface material; one coat of primer and two coats of exterior paint. B. Paint graphics in styles, sizes and colors as selected. 3.02 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS A. Paint exposed surfaces; one coat primer and one coat of exterior paint. B. Paint graphics in styles, sizes and colors as selected. C. Install at a height for optimum visibility, on ground -mounted poles or attached to temporary structural surfaces. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition; repair damages to structure, framing or sign. B. Relocate informational signs as required by the progress of the Work. 3.04 REMOVAL A. Remove signs, framing, supports and foundations at completion of Project. END OF SECTION 4219 PROJECT SIGNS 01580 - 2 110 Future Site of Conrado & La La Cavazos Baseball Complex, Bill McAlister Park Lubbock voters approved funding for this project as part of the 2000 Capital Improvements Program. Designed by: Constructed By: Schrickel, Rollins and Associates, Inc. General Contractor Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. "City of Lubbock Logo" For more Information Contact City of Lubbock Parks and Recreation (806) 775.2687 Scheduled Completion Spring 2002 This is the text to be used for the Temporary Project Sign. See Temporary Project Sign Elevation..9, Sheet 10. SECTION 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS { 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install Products specified, under conditions for options and substitutions stated in this Section. 1.02 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 30 days after award of Contract, submit to Architect/Engineer five -copies of complete list of major Products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate Products by Specification Section number and title. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such Product: 1. Name and address of manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalogue designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. +•. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For Products specified only by reference standard, select Product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For Products specified by naming several Products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named which complies with Specifications. C. For Products specified by naming only one Product and manufacturer, there is no option and a no substitution will be allowed (unless substitution is approved prior to bid opening). 1.04 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A. Prior to the Bid Date: Architect/Engineer will consider substitutions as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions. B. After the Bid Date: Architect/Engineer will consider formal written requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place of those specified only when submitted in accordance with the requirements of this Section. One or more of the following conditions must be documented. 1. The substitution must be required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirements or insurance regulations. 2. The substitution must be due to the unavailability of the specified products, through no fault of the Contractor. Long delivery period will not qualify as unavailability. 3. The substitution may be requested when subsequent information discloses the inability of the specified products to perform properly or to fit in the designated space. SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 4219 01630 - 1 7 4. The substitution may be due to the manufacturer's or fabricator's refusal to certify or guarantee performance of the specified product as required. 5. The substitution may be requested when it is clearly seen, in the judgement of the Architect/Engineer, that a substitution would be substantially to the Owner's best interests in terms of cost, time or other considerations. C. Submit a separate requestfor each substitution on a copy of the request form attached to this section. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; C. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; list significant variations. 3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts. 5. List of changes required in other work or Products. 6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified. a. Amount of any net change to Contract Sum. 7. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 8. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials. D. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from Contractor. 2. They are requested directly by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. E. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of Architect/Engineer and Owner. F. Architect/Engineer and Owner will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making formal request for substitution Contractor represents that: 1. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. He will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified. 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his Contract, but not: a. Costs under separate contracts. b. Arch itect/Engineer's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents. 6. He will reimburse the Owner separately for fees paid to the Architect/Engineer for redesign, revision of Contract Documents, and review of each substitution request. (Refer to General Conditions.) SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 4219 01630 - 2 1.06 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 4219 01630 - 3 r I GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION (Submit five copies.) Request No. Project Name: Project Name: Contractor Name and Address: Date Hereby requests approval of the following product or system as an "approved substitution." Specification Section No. Page(s) Paragraph Drawing No(s). Detail or Section No(s). USE SEPARATE FORM FOR EACH SUBMITTAL. Name and description of submittal for substitutions. Manufacturer: Address: Telephone: Vendor: Address: Telephone: Are maintenance services and replacement parts available through vendor? Differences between proposed substitution and specified item? For finish materials and prefinished equipment, list the colors available for the specified item and the colors available for the proposed substitution: Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: ❑ Same ❑ Different. Explain differences on an attachment. Reason for not giving priority to specified item: Substitution affects other material or systems: ❑ No ❑ Yes (if yes, attach complete data.) n 4219 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01630 - 4 Enclosed data is (with specific marks related to substitution): IIAeI ❑ Catalog ❑ Drawings ❑ Sample ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑ Other List items or elements that are the same as the specified item. Attach list of similar projects using the product attachment. Include Owner, and Owner's representative to ..: contact. State effects of substitution on construction schedule, and changes in other work or project. What license fees or royalties are required? a The undersigned states that the function, appearance, quality and results are equivalent or superior to the specified items and that Substantial Completion will not be affected. Submitted by: Contractors Signature Firm A" Address Telephone Date A Owner's Signature: For 00 DMAr Pi+le,# P M I _SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS ::,: 4219 01630 - 5 s*� SECTION 01670 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Instruction and demonstration of operation of each system to Owner's designated representatives. 1.02 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Arrange for services of qualified manufacturer's representatives to fully instruct Owner on specialized portions of installation, such as automatic controls, electrical and mechanical systems, irrigation systems, lighting systems, etc. C. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. D. Return at first change of season for changeover from air conditioning to heating, or from heating to air conditioning. E. Submit complete record of instructions as part of maintenance instructions and data book given to Owner. For each instructional period, supply following data: 1. Date. 2. System or equipment involved. 3. Names of persons giving instructions. 4. Other persons present. F. Amount of time to be devoted to instructional sessions shall be reasonable and consistent with size and complexity of equipment. 4219 !�N END OF SECTION SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATIONS 01670 - 1 r SECTION 01700. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Comply with requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract and in Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the Work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions of the Contract. B. Section 01010: Summary of Work. C. Section 01020: Allowances. D. Section 01710: Cleaning -up. E. The respective sections of Specifications: Closeout Submittals Required of Trades. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When Contractor considers the Work is substantially complete, he shall submit to Architect/Engineer: 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete. 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Architect/Engineer will make an examination to determine the status of completion. C. Should Architect/Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 1. Architect/Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons therefore. 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written notice of substantial completion to the Architect/Engineer. 3. Architect/Engineer will re-examine the Work. D. When Architect/Engineer concurs that the Work is substantially complete, he will: 1. Prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, accompanied by Contractor's list of items to be corrected, as verified and amended by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Submit the Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. 1.04 FINAL OBSERVATION A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 3. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are operational. 4. Work is ready for final examination. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 4219 01700 - 1 0 B. Architect/Engineer will make an examination to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. C. Should Architect/Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete, or defective: 1. Arch itect/En gin eer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete - or defective work. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a second written certification to Architect/Engineer that the Work is complete. 3. Architect/Engineer will re-examine the Work. D. When the Architect/Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. 1.05 REINSPECTION FEES A. Should Architect/Engineer perform re-examinations due to failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: 1. Owner will compensate Architect/Engineer for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the Contractor. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ARCHITECT/ENGINEER A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities: 1. Certificate of Occupancy. 2. Certificates of Inspection: a. Mechanical and Electrical systems as required by the respective sections. B. Project Record Documents: to requirements of General Conditions of the Contract. C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel: to the requirements of General Conditions of the Contract and Section 01670 - Systems Demonstrations. D. Warranties and Bonds. E. Keys and Keying Schedule. F. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: To requirements of General and Supplementary Conditions. G. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. H. Spare Parts as called for in Sections 1-16. 1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Contractor shall submit.the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION * CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 4219 01700 - 2 CQ SECTION 01710 CLEANING UP PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Execute cleaning, during progress of Work, and at completion of Work, as required by General Conditions. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. B. Cleaning up required for specific Products or work; Specification Section for that work. :a 0 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ;1 A. Fire Protection: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. B. Pollution Control: Conduct clean-up and disposal operations to comply with local codes, ordinances and anti -pollution laws. 1. Burning or burying of rubbish and waste materials on the project site is prohibited. 2. Disposal of volatile fluid wastes, (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner), in storm or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways is prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS rl* l ' A. Use only cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B, Use only those cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION r- 4219 A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep Work, site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and debris, resulting from construction operations. B. At not less than every week during progress of Work, clean up site and access and legally dispose of waste materials, rubbish and debris away from site. C. Provide on -site dump containers for collection of waste materials, rubbish and debris. CLEANING UP 01710 - 1 I D, Do not allow waste materials, rubbish and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly or hazardous condition. !� E. Lower waste materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials from heights. 3.02 CLEAN -OUT SITES FOR CONCRETE TRUCKS A. If the Contractor allows concrete trucks to be washed out on the site, their residue and waste shall be washed or dumped directly into two (2) feet deep pits provided by the Contractor near a water source. B. When use of a pit is terminated, its contents and contaminated soil shall be excavated as "waste" per Section 02200, and pit shall be filled with soil stockpiled from its excavation. C. The original grade shall be restored. 3.02 DUST CONTROL A. Sprinkle dusty debris with water. B. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning on an as needed basis until building is ready for acceptance or occupancy. ;., C. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly painted surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. B. Remove grease, mastics, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints and other foreign materials from sight an exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to match adiacent finishes. 4219 D. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. E. Ventilating system: 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction. 2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operating without filters during construction. F. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. G. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. H. Sweep and buff resilient floors and base. I. Vacuum carpeted floor areas. J. Replace broken or scratched glass with new glass. CLEANING UP 01710 - 2 K. Prior to final completion, or Owner occupancy, conduct an inspection of sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and all work areas, to verify that entire Work is clean. END OF SECTION e' Y, 4219 CLEANING UP 01710 - 3 9 SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: Work in this section includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and services required for clearing and grubbing, minor demolition, removal and disposal of items as specified herein and on the plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. r B. Existing Conditions, Removal and Demolition Items, and Grading Plan: Refer to plan sheets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS �... 2.01 No products are required to execute this work, except as the Contractor may deem necessary. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING: A. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of removing all natural and artificial objectionable materials from the project site or from limited areas of construction specified within the site. B. In general, clearing and grubbing shall be performed in advance of grading and earthwork operations and shall be performed over the entire area of earthwork operations. C. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, all trees and shrubs of three (3") inches caliper and ""'; less (caliper is the diameter as measured twelve (12") inches above the ground) and all scrub growth, such as cactus, yucca, vines, and shrub thickets, shall be cleared. All dead trees, logs, stumps, rubbish of any nature, and other surface debris shall also be cleared. 7 I D. Buried material such as logs, stumps, roots of downed trees that are greater than one and one-half (1-1/2") inches in diameters, matted roots, rubbish, and foreign debris shall be grubbed and removed to a minimum depth of twenty-four (24") inches below proposed finished grades. E. Ground covers of weeds, grass, and other herbaceous vegetation shall be removed prior to stripping and stockpiling topsoil from areas of earthwork operations. Such removal shall be accomplished by "blading" off the uppermost layers of sod or root -matted soil for removal. 3.02 TREES AND SHRUBS TO BE PRESERVED AND PROTECTED: A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, trees and shrubs with calipers greater than three (3") inches shall not be cleared (removed) provided that both of the following conditions are met: 1. The vegetation exists in an area that is not proposed for pavement, a structure, or the playing bounds of an athletic field. 2. The vegetation is in an area where the cut or fill does not exceed six (5") inches. 4219 SITE PREPARATION 02100 - 1 B. The Owner will assist the Contractor in identifying trees that are to be saved from clearing. The Contractor will protect such trees from construction damage such as trunk impacts and scrapes, limb breakage, compaction of soil within the drip line, and other injurious construction activities. 1. If necessary, the Owner may direct the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, to erect protective stockades along the drip lines of trees that the Owner considers vulnerable to damage. Such stockades shall be of eight (8') foot long x six (6") inch diameter posts vertically buried three (T) feet deep at six (6) foot intervals along the drip line. C. Where grading or clearing and grubbing operations are to occur between trees that are to be preserved and protected, the Contractor will prune the lower branches of these trees as necessary to prevent their breakage and to permit access by construction machinery. Branches will be cut off to the trunk or major limb in a workmanlike manner. The Architect/Engineer may direct that the Contractor remove additional branches in such a manner that the tree presents a balanced appearance. Scars will be treated with a heavy coat of an approved tree sealant. 3.03 PAVEMENT REMOVAL: A. Bituminous and concrete pavements shall be removed to neatly sawed edges. Saw cuts shall be made to a minimum depth of one and one-half (1-1/2") inches. If a saw cut in concrete pavement falls within three (T) feet of an existing score joint, construction joint, saw joint, cold joint, expansion joint, or edge, the concrete shall be removed to that joint or edge. All saw cuts shall be parallel and/or perpendicular to the line of existing pavement. If an edge of a cut is damaged subsequent to saw cutting, the concrete shall again be sawed to a neat, straight line for the purpose of removing the damaged area. B. Concrete curb and gutter shall be removed as specified above. No section to be replaced shall be smaller than thirty (30") inches in length or width. 3.04 UTILITIES REMOVAL: In general, those utilities on the site that are to be removed and that belong to the Owner shall be removed by the Contractor. The Owner is responsible for arranging the e�* relocation or removal of other utilities owned by utility companies or other parties. 3.05 MINOR DEMOLITION: There may be certain items on the site such as old building foundations, fences, and other undetermined structures and improvements that must be removed before •* construction can commence. Unless otherwise specified, such items become the property of the Contractor for subsequent disposal. 3.06 USE OF EXPLOSIVES: The use of explosives will not be permitted in site preparation operations unless specifically permitted by the Owner in writing. 3.07 BACKFILLING: All holes, cavities, and depressions in the ground caused by site preparation operations will be backfilled and tamped to normal compaction and will be graded to prevent ponding of water and to promote drainage. In areas that are to be immediately excavated, the Architect/Engineer may permit holes, etc., to remain open. 3.08 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS: A. Unless otherwise stated, materials generated by clearing, grubbing, removal, and demolition shall be known as "waste" or "spoils" and shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. SITE PREPARATION 4219 02100 - 2 r IR"? B. No burning of combustible materials will be allowed unless specifically approved by the Owner. Burning, if allowed, shall be done in accordance with Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission requirements for control of air pollution. raw A „ C. In certain cases, the Owner or Architect/Engineer may grant special permission for the Contractor to dispose of certain "wastes" or "spoils" by deep burial on the site. Such material would be buried in an approved area; would not be organic, biodegradable, or crushable; and would be buried in lifts or layers with soil thoroughly compacted around and over the material. A minimum of thirty (30") inches of cover would be required over the burial site. END OF SECTION x i sw F �a s SITE PREPARATION 4219 02100 - 3 %1 SECTION 02210 EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL COMPOST PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: Work in this section includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and services required to construct, shape, and finish earthwork to the required lines, grades, and cross sections as specified herein and on the plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Section 02100 - Site Preparation. B. Section 02223 - Excavation, Grading, and Subgrade Preparation C. Grading Plan. 1.03 TEST REPORTS: The Owner will bear the cost of all routine testing requirements and will submit test reports from a commercial testing laboratory selected by the Owner as specified herein and in the Conditions of the Contract. 1.04 METHOD OF PAYMENT: Earthwork is a necessaryand incidental partof the work. The total cost will be included in the Bid Proposal. Payment will not be made on a unit price basis nor by any other separate measured payment method. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION: Unclassified excavation shall consist of all excavation, unless separately designated, within the limits of the work. Unclassified excavation includes all material encountered regardless of its nature or the manner in which it is to be excavated. 2.02 UNCLASSIFIED FILL: A. Unclassified fill shall consist of all fill within the limits of the work. All suitable native materials removed in unclassified excavation, or similar imported materials, shall be used insofar as practicable as unclassified fill Properly deposited, conditioned, and compacted fill is hereinafter referred to as "earth embankment." B. Rock: Minor quantities of rock not greater than four (4") inches in greatest dimension are permissible in fill materials used to construct earth embankment. Minor quantities of rock of greater dimensions may be placed in the deeper fills in accordance with the Texas Department of Transportation requirements for construction of rock embankments, provided such placement of rock is not immediately adjacent to structures or piers. Also, rock may be placed in the portions of embankments outside the limits of the completed graded width where the size of the rock prohibits their incorporation in the normal embankment layers. 2.03 TOPSOIL: Shall be as follows: A. On -Site Topsoil: Topsoil shall consist of an average depth of six (6") inches of native surface soil left in place after the ground cover of herbaceous vegetation and other objectionable matter has been cleared by "blading," as specified in Section 02100, or suitable on -site topsoil stock piled from areas on -site where cutting or filling operations will not be at natural grades. The topsoil must be free of objectionable matter that would render is a "unsuitable material' as described herein. EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL COMPOST 4219 102210 - 1 2.04 IMPORTED FILL: A. Imported fill materials shall be used for the construction of earth embankment in the event that (1) the volume of unclassified excavation is less than the volume of fill required for earth embankment and/or (2) the condition of materials removed in unclassified excavation makes them unsuitable for use in the construction of earth embankment. B. The Contractor shall haul and place imported fill obtained from off -site sources as necessary to construct the embankment and various other details of the construction plans. All costs related to such imported fill will be included in the contract price, and no additional or separate payment for imported fill will be due the Contractor. C. A sample of the proposed imported fill must be provided by the Contractor and be approved by the Architect/Engineer. In general, imported material must be equal to or betterthan native material in quality and engineering characteristics. The Architect/ Engineer may also require the Contractor to provided a material analysis test of the proposed fill. 2.05 UNSUITABLE MATERIALS: A. Topsoil, select material, imported fill, or unclassified fillwill be declared as "unsuitable" by the Architect/Engineer if, in his opinion, any of the following conditions or matter and particles are present to a degree that is judged detrimental to the proposed use of the material. 1. Moisture. 2. Decayed or undecayed vegetation. 3. Hardpan clay, heavy clay, or clay balls. 4. Rubbish. 5. Construction rubble. 6. Sand or gravel. 7. Rocks, cobbles, or boulders. 8. Cementious matter. 9. Foreign matter of any kind. B. Unsuitable materials will be disposed of as "waste" as specified in Section 02100. C. Wet Material: If fill material is unsatisfactory for use as embankment solely because of high moisture content, the Architect/Engineer may grant the Contractor permission to process the material to reduce the moisture content to a usable optimum condition. 2.06 COMPOST: Shall be well -rotted organic material such as cotton hulls or pine bark, or a combination of 80% vegetable matter and 20% manure products or approved equal. This material shall have been composted at least nine (9) months and shall be free of fungus, grass, weed seed, debris, or any toxic substances. Compost shall be "screened" so that no particles are greater than in diameter. "New Life Acid Grow" as produced by Soil Building Systems, Inc., Dallas, Texas, 972-831-8181; or Premium Grade "Compost" as produced by Vital Earth Resources, Gladewater, Texas, 903-845- 2163, are examples of acceptable products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE PREPARATION: In general, "site preparation," as specified in Section 02100, shall be performed in advance of grading and earthwork operations and shall be completed over the entire area of earthwork operations. EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL COMPOST 4219 02210 2 I 3.02 ATHLETIC FIELD TOPSOIL PLACEMENT, MIXING AND FINE GRADING: A. Topsoil and compost shall be mixed onsite at a ratio of 75% topsoil and 25% compost. Topsoil mix shall be free of gravel and debris as shown on plans. B. Topsoil mix shall first be placed and compacted to normal density, minimum 90% of Standard Proctor Density, at a depth of eight (8") inches and shall be graded to within 0.10 foot of finished grade. C. Compost shall be incorporated into the topsoil prior to fine grading. Compost shall be spread evenly over the athletic field area, then incorporated into the top six (6") inches of topsoil using a pulvimixer, until they are pulverized and a homogenous layer of topsoil ready for planting. Apply a minimum of six cubic yards of compost per 1,000 square feet. This should result in a layer approximately two (2") inches in depth before mixing. D. After mixing, athletic field topsoil shall be compacted as specified above and fine graded to within 0.05 foot of finished grade. 3.03 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION: A. All excavated areas shall be maintained in a condition to assure proper drainage at all times, and ditches and sumps shall be constructed and maintained to avoid damage to the areas under construction. Erosion control measures shall be installed and maintained during construction operations. B. Surplus Material: 1. Surplus excavation is that quantity of material that may be left over after the grading plan is executed, and all earthwork operations, including excavation, embankment construction, topsoil replacement, and final grading, are completed. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall dispose of surplus material as "waste" as specified in Section 02100. 2. Excavation in Rock: The use of explosives will not be permitted unless specifically permitted in writing by the Owner. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, excavation in solid rock shall extend six (6") inches below required subgrade elevation for the entire width of the area under construction and shall be backfilled with suitable materials as indicated on the plans. 3.04 EARTH EMBANKMENT: A. Earth embankment is defined as embankment composed of suitable materials removed in unclassified excavation and/or imported fill. The construction of embankment includes preparing the area on which fill is to be placed and the depositing, conditioning, and compaction of fill material. B. General: Except as otherwise required by the plans, all embankment shall be constructed in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade of the graded area, and each layer shall be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope as shown on the grading plan. Embankments shall be constructed to correspond to the general shape of the typical sections shown on the plans, and each section of the embankment shall correspond to the detailed section or slopes established by the drawings. After completion of the graded area, embankment shall be continuously maintained to its finished section and grade until the project is accepted. EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL COMPOST 4219 02210 - 3 Fe C. Preparation: Prior to placing any embankment, all preparatory operations will have been completed on the excavation sources and areas overwhich the embankment is to be placed. Stump holes or other small excavations in the limits of the embankments shall be backfilled with suitable material and thoroughly tamped by approved methods before commencing G embankment construction. The surface of the ground, including plowed, loosened ground, or surfaces roughened by small washes or otherwise, shall be restored to approximately its F" original slope by blading or other methods. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support the construction equipment without displacement. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. The subgrade shall be proof rolled to detect soft spots, which if exist, shall be reworked. Proof rolling shall be performed using a heavy pneumatic tired roller, loaded dump truck, or similar piece of equipment weighing approximately 25 tons. The proof rolling operations shall be observed by the geotechnical engineer or his representative. D. Scarification: The surface of all areas and slopes over which fill is to be placed, other than rock, shall be scarified to a depth of four (4") to six (6") inches to provide a bond between the existing surface and the proposed embankment. Scarification shall be accomplished by plowing, discing, or other approved means. The material that has been loosened shall be recompacted with the new embankment. The first lift shall have no more than two (2") inches in loose depth added to the scarified material. E. Benching: Scarification is normally adequate for sloping surfaces. However, in certain cases where fill is to be placed against hillsides or existing embankment with slopes greater than four to one (4:1), the Architect/Engineer may direct the Contractor to key the fill material to �^ the existing slopes by benching. A minimum of two (2') feet normal to the slope shall be removed and recompacted to insure that the new work is constructed on a firm foundation free of loose or disturbed material. F. Depositing:Fill material shall be placed in horizontal layers or lifts, evenly spread, not to exceed eight (8") inches in loose depth before conditioning and compaction. Unless otherwise permitted, each layer of fill material shall cover the length and width of the area to be filled and shall be conditioned and compacted before the next higher layer of fill is placed. The fill material shall be uniform with respect to material type and moisture content. Clods and chunks of material shall be broken and the fill material mixed by discing, blading, or plowing, as necessary, so that a material of uniform moisture and density is obtained for each lift. Adequate drainage shall be maintained at all times. G. Watering: At the time of compaction, the moisture content of fill material shall be such that the specified compaction will be obtained, and the fill will be firm, hard, and unyielding. Fill material which contains excessive moisture shall not be compacted until it is dry enough to obtain the specified compaction. Water required for sprinkling to bring the fill material to the proper moisture content should be applied evenly through each layer. H. Compacting: Each layer of earth fill shall be compacted by approved tamping or sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic tire rollers, or other mechanical means acceptable to the Arch itect/Engineer. Hand -directed compaction equipment shall be used in areas inaccessible to vehicular compactors. I. Grading: Embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence and at proper densities for their respective functions. All embankment serves in one capacity or another as subgrade (e.g., under topsoil, under pavement, under structures, etc.). Accordingly, the upper layer of embankment shall be graded to within plus or minus 0.10 foot of proper subgrade elevation prior to depositing topsoil, and prior to the construction of pavements, slabs, etc. (See Building Earthwork.) EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL COMPOST 4219 02210 - 4 W 3.05 DENSITY CONTROL: A. Earth Embankment in General: On -site sandy clay soils used in earth embankment shall be compacted in maximum eight-(81)- in"s-a _ninety-two (92%) to one hundred (100%) percent of.Standard Proctor Density ASTM D698`v0ith moisture content ranging between optimum to:WV_e °Tjpercentage"point""s`"above opfimurrl eEay-seil�. B. Earth E;bankment Under Pavement: The top six (6") inches of natural earth comprising the subgrfor areas of pavement shall be ninety-five (95%) to ninety-eight (98%) percent of with the moisture content at two (2%) to four (4%) percent above optimum. Sidewalks six (6) feet and less in width and individual paved areas less than one hundred fifty (150) square feet in surface area are excluded from this requirement. 3.06 MOISTURE MAINTENANCE: The specified moisture content shall be maintained in all embankments that are to function as subgrade for structures, areas of pavement, or for select embankment. After completion of the embankment, the Contractor shall prevent excessive loss of moisture in the embankment by sprinkling as required. Loss of moisture in excess of two (2%) percent below optimum in the top twelve (12") inches of the fill will require that the top twelve (12") inches of the embankment be scarified, wetted, and recompacted prior to placement of the structure, select fill or pavement. If desired, the Contractor may place an asphalt membrane of emulsified or cutback asphalt over the completed embankment and thus eliminate the sprinkling requirement. 3.07 TESTING: Field density tests shall be taken as each lift of fill material is placed. As a guide, one field density test per lift for each 5,000 square feet of compacted area is recommended. For small areas or critical areas the frequency of testing shall be increased to one test per 2,500 square feet. A minimum of two tests per lift should be required. The earthwork operations shall be observed and tested on a continuing basis by an experienced geotechnician working in conjunction with the project geotechnical engineer. 3.08 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT: The Contractor shall perform his construction operations in accordance with best management practices to control pollutants in storm water discharges during construction. The Contractor shall conform to local state and federal regulations regarding control of storm water pollutants, silt, and sediments leaving the site. The Contractor shall submit and obtain a Land Disturbing Activities Permitfrom the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). The Contractor, as applicant, shall submit the latest permit application form and accompanying information requested by the EPA. Refer also to SECTION 00821 - STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN. 3.9 RECORD DRAWINGS: Upon completion of the grading operations the Contractor must verify the site grading by having a registered public surveyor shoot grades on a 25' grid overlaid over the baseball playing field areas. The grades must be transferred to a reproducible drawing of the grading plan for approval by the Owner or Arch itect/Engineer. No construction can proceed until this "Record Drawing" has been approved by the Owner. All costs for surveying must be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL COMPOST 4219 02210-5 Wi September 4, 2001 lew SECTION 02223 EXCAVATION, GRADING, AND SU13GRADE PREPARATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The work to be done under this section consists of providing all labor, materials and equipment, required for all excavation, grading and subgrade preparation for areas to receive foundation base material. Excavation, filling and grading shall conform to the lines and grades as shown on the drawings and as directed. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation shall consist of removal of all materials from areas where subgrade or finished grade is below existing ground. Excavated material shall be disposed of by the contractor. No additional compensation will be made for hauling or disposing of waste material or excess excavation. B. Care shall be taken in all excavation work to avoid damage to existing electric cables, water ^' lines, gas lines, manholes and other utilities and installations which are to remain in service. C. All excavation shall be done to neat lines and grades as shown on the drawings or as directed. .•, Any excavation below such grade, and the consequent filling to the established grade, shall be done at the expense of the contractor. ..e 3.2 SUBGRADE FINISHING A. Subgrade shall be finished accurately to grades and cross sections shown on the drawings and established in the field. Where subgrade is in cut, the surface shall be brought accurately to grade and cross section by blading or hand grading where required. The surface shall then be rolled with the pneumatic roller and then with the three wheel roller until it presents a uniform, thoroughly compacted appearance. The entire subgrade area, in cut and in fill, shall be compacted to 98 % of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by Tex 114-E. Areas inaccessible to the roller shall be given equal compaction by other approved methods. Moisture shall be maintained in the material by sprinkling. Warped sections and other irregularities in section as shown on the drawings or established in the field, shall be accurately ® 2001 ha an .tr o Ar h6tgcW, Inc. EXCAVATION GRADING AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION 02223 -1 Unauthor¢ed duplication proh� rted. , , - September 4, 2001 formed in the subgrade during the finishing operation. 'Blue tops" set to finished subgrade elevations by the contractor shall be set as required, for proper shaping of the area being graded. F 3.3 ROLLING EQUIPMENT A. Rolling equipment shall be as required to obtain the specified compaction. All compaction equipment shall be approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION PUR t..� ,1 F ®a�°10 be2�P1�caLonprDRh6t3�`e`�°i EXCAVATION, GRADING, AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION 02223 -2 SECTION O2230 ' INFIELD SURFACING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: This item shall govern the placement and compaction of surfacing for the baseball and softball infields, and the baseball pitching mound. PART 2-PRODUCTS - ' 2.01 INFIELD SURFACING: Infield surfacing shall be a mixture of the following materials: A. Red ���minad�m�rgin�ypi�or�nks.nc�a�dtoamaximum d�me�rof}�. -- B. "Masonry"sand with a particle size as graded within the following limits: p/ r| No. 2 GO. C. ATCDiamond Pro Infield Conditioner: Acalcified clay aggregate, orapproved equal. Infield Conditioner inavailable from ATCDiamond Pro, (OOO)228-2AO7. D. "Stabilizer': A non -toxic organic soil binder additive. Stabilizer is available locallyfrom Master Turf Products, (817)28O-4777. E. All soil types must be free of foreign noU, debris, gravel, nook organic matter, and other objectionable foreign matehoi F. Infield surfacing mixtures shall be 706 clay and 30% sand by volume. 2.02 SAMPLE: Provide a one gallon sample of the proposed premixed infield surfacing material submitted for the Owner's approval, prior toinstallation. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INFIELD SURFACING: � A. Delivery: Infield surfacing shall be delivered in truck beds that have been completely cleaned of gravel or any other matter. Any load of material delivered which contains gravel will be rejected. B. Subgrade: The subgrade shall have been prepared to a depth of eight (8") inches to receive the surfacing material. r^ |N SURFACING ..�^~,. ~- 29 02230-1 r �� C. Mixing: Surfacing material will be pre -mixed as in Item2.O1. F., off -site, delivered -- hothe site, and dumped in piles evenly spaced around the infield. Surfacing material shall be thoroughly blended in manner approved bythe Owner. z/ -- O. Placement: Surfacing material mixture ohoU be dumped and opnaod to the depth of six (6") inches. Infield conditioner shall be spread over the surfacing material in a one (1") inch layer and "Stabilizer" mhoU be applied at rote of I pound per3O square feet. Infield Conditioner �! and "Stybi|izer'shall be tilled into the infield surfacing toadepth offour (4")inches. E. Fine Grading: The surface of the surfacing material for the infield after fine grading shall be true to line, grade and cross section. When tested with an eight (8 ) foot straight edge it shall �. have nodeviation from the face ofthe straight edge inexcess ofone-fourth (Y4') inch atany point. Any point of the surface not meeting these requirements shall be corrected. F. � VVatehng'VVotershall be applied over the entire area and allowed to penetrate toodepth of four (4") inches or until water is visibly standing on the surfacing material. This is necessary to activate the ''StabUioac" After surface water has disappeared the surfacing shall be C compacted. G. Compaction: Infield surfacing shall be compacted between ninety (90%) and ninety-five (05%) percent ofStandard AASHTO Density by rolling with a small one (1) ton roller. The ` finished product shall be eight (9") inches of compacted ourfacing, finely graded to the �^ finished contours indicated on the plans. p` END OFSECTION ^~ �1 LA, |19� ' � INFIELD SURFACING � O223O ' «nn 2 _ `` 0 rya SECTION 02510 FLEXIBLE BASE PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: This section consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install crushed stone flexible base for hot mix asphalt concrete. As required in these specification and as shown on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Section 02515 - Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit to the Architect/Engineer Flexible Base Gradation Certification and source. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: Flexible base shall be added to the pulvermixed asphalt material in the absence of existing base during the mixing operation. Crushed stone used shall be obtained form crushing limestone. All crushed stone used on the project shall conform to the requirements of Item 302.3, Type A, Grade 1, Aggregate, of the STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF HIGHWAYS, STREETS AND BRIDGES as adopted by the Texas Department of Transportation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE: The roadbed shall be excavated and shaped in conformity with the typical sections shown on plans and to the lines and grades as established by the Engineer. All unstable or otherwise objectionable material shall be removed from the subgrade and replaced with approved material. All holes, ruts and depressions shall be filled with approved material and, if required, the subgrade shall be thoroughly wetted with water and reshaped and rolled to the extent directed in orderto place the subgrade in an acceptable condition to receive the base material. The surface of the subgrade shall be finished to line and grade as established and in conformity with the typical section shown on plans, and any deviation in excess of inch in cross section and in a length of 16 feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. Sufficient subgrade shall be prepared in advance to insure satisfactory prosecution of the work. Material excavated in the preparation of the subgrade shall be utilized in the construction of adjacent shoulders and slopes or otherwise disposed of as directed, and any additional material required for the completion of the shoulders and slopes shall be secured from sources indicated on plans or designated by the Engineer. 3.02 DELIVERY: The material shall be delivered in approved vehicles of a uniform capacity, and it shall be the charge of the Contractor that the required amount of specified material shall be delivered in each 100 foot station. Material deposited upon the subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same day. In the event inclement weather or other unforeseen circumstances render impractical the spreading of the material during the first 24-hour period, the material shall be scarified and spread as directed by the Engineer. The material shall be sprinkled, if directed, and shall then be bladed, dragged and shaped to conform to typical sections as shown on plans. All areas and "nests" of segregated coarse or fine material shall be corrected or removed and replaced with well graded material, as directed by the Engineer. If additional binder is considered desirable or necessary after the material is spread and shaped, it shall be furnished and supplied in the amount directed by the FLEXIBLE BASE 4219 02510 - 1 AMR F- Engineer. Such binder material shall be carefully and evenly incorporated with the material in place by scarifying, harrowing, brooming or other approved methods. 3.03 COMPACTION: The course shall besprinkled as required and compacted to the extent necessary to provide not less than the percent density as hereinafter specified under "Density." In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the flexible base shown on the plans shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. After each section of flexible base is completed, tests as indicated under 305 will be as directed by the Engineer. If the material fails to meet the density requirements, it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical sections shown on the plans and to the established lines and grades. In that area on which pavement is to be placed, any deviation in excess of % inch in cross section in a length of 16 feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. All irregularities, depressions or weak spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding suitable material as required, reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. Should the base course, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density or finish before the surfacing is complete, it shall be recompacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. 3.04 DENSITY: The density for compaction of the flexible base shall be ninety-five (95%) percent of Standard AASHTO Density per Test T99 with a moisture content of plus or minus two (2%) percent of optimum. 3.05 TESTS: A minimum of five (5) density tests will be required as selected by the Engineer, paid for by the Contractor. END OF SECTION FLEXIBLE BASE 4219 02510 - 2 9 SECTION 02665 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: This section covers water distribution lines and water services to points indicated outside all proposed building structures to which service is required. This section also covers all water line appurtenances including valves, valve boxes, fire hydrants, service fittings, etc., and all testing and sterilization. Additionally, the Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Construction, City of Lubbock, shall apply for all water line construction on this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Section 02515 - Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling. B. Section 02675 - Water Meter Installations. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit to the Architect/Engineer in conformance with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: 4219 A. Ductile Iron Water Pipe: Ductile iron pipe shall be fabricated in accordance with ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C 151). All ductile iron water pipe shall be thickness Class 52. 1. Ductile iron pipe joints shall be "push on" type as indicated on the plans, and shall conform to the latest edition of AWWA C 111 (ANSI A 21.11). 2. Ductile iron pipe shall have a bituminous outside coating in accordance with ANSI A 21.6 (AWWA C 106) and shall have a cement mortar lining in accordance with ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C 104). B. Ductile Iron Fittings: Ductile iron fittings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C 110- 77 (ANSI A 21.10-1971) designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psi. Fittings shall be flanged or mechanical joint in accordance with plan requirements. 1. All ductile iron fittings shall have a "Standard Thickness" cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coat over the cement mortar lining in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA C 104 (ANSI A 21.4). Ductile iron fittings shall have a bituminous "Standard Outside Coating" of either coal tar or asphalt base in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA C 106 (ANSI 21.6). C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Pipe: The polyvinyl chloride (PVC) water pipe shall in all respects comply with the latest revision of A.W.W.A. Standard C900 for DR14 (Class 200) and DR 18 (Class 150) PVC water pipe. D. Gate Valves: The gate valves which are to be installed shown on the plans shall conform strictly to the A.W.W.A. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR GATE VALVES, A.W.W.A. C500-71, except for the changes and additional specifically outlined as follows: WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 02665 - 1 0 1. Gate valves shall be double disc, parallel seat, internal wedging type with cast iron body and bronze mountings. Valves shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psi. 2. Unless otherwise specified, all gate valves shall have non -rising stems and shall turn counter -clockwise to open. Valves shall have wrench nuts for operation unless otherwise specified. In the event the top of the operating nut is more than six feet (6') feet deep from the existing ground elevation, valve stem extensions shall be furnished by the Contractor to bring the operating nut to within three feet (T) of the existing ground level. No separate payment shall be made for furnishing and installing the necessary valve stem extensions. All valves shall be for vertical installation. E. Fire Hydrants: Fire hydrants shall be Mueller Improved or equivalent, as indicated on plan details. F. Restrained Joints: All mechanical joint type valves and fittings shall be restrained using retainer glands as manufactured by EBAA Iron, Inc., of Eastland, Texas, or approved equal. No separate pay will be made for retainer glands. G. Valve Indicator Post: Valve indicator posts shall be placed for gate valves on the fire protection lines as indicated on the plans. Valve indicator post shall be adjustable and shall be Mueller Co., Model A-20800 or approved equal. Contractor shall determine the depth to valve and install post of proper length and adjustment span. H. Fire Department Connection: The fire department connection consists of a check valve in a valve box and a standpipe with siamese connections. The check valve shall be 6" in size and shall be a spring -loaded toggle lever check valve as manufactured by Cla-Val Co., or approved equal. Valve box shall be suitably sized concrete or plastic box with removable lid. The standpipe with siamese connection shall be Standard Fire West, Model No. S315SQ-4, 4-way square style, or approved equal. Fire department connections shall be installed as shown per plan and details. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATIONS: 4219 A. Concrete Backing: Concrete having compressive strength of not less than 1,500 psi shall be used as a cradle or backing where shown on the plans or where directed by the Architect/Engineer. All materials including aggregates, cement, and water, as well as the mixing and placing between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored; the area of bearing on pipe and on ground in each instance shall be that required by the Architect/Engineer. The backing shall, unless otherwise directed, be placed so that the pipe and fitting joints will be accessible for repair. 1. Concrete shall be composed of normal portland cement, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and water proportioned and mixed properly in a concrete mixer. Transit mix concrete will be allowed, Portland cement shall be Type 1 and shall be fully protected until incorporated in this work. Gravel to be used for coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable grains, and shall be free from an excess of salt or alkali and foreign materials. Concrete shall have a compressive strength of not less than 1,500 psi at twenty-eight (28) days and shall have not less than three (3) sacks of cement nor more than six and three-quarter (6-3/4) gallons of water per cubic yard of concrete. WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 02665 - 2 I B. Cleaning and Sterilization of Water Mains: Before any newly constructed water main is placed into service, it shall be cleaned and tested, or cleaned, sterilized and tested until the bacteria count within the mains meets the standards of purity established by the City of Lubbock Water Department's Laboratory. 1. During the construction operations, workmen shall use care to assure that all installed surfaces of the system which will come in contact with the City water supply are maintained in a sanitary condition. 2. Every effort must be made to keep the inside of the pipe, fittings, and valves free of all loose foreign matter. a. As each joint of pipe is being laid, it shall be swabbed with a clean and effective cleaning tool. b. Exposed open ends of pipe must be temporarily blocked or capped during construction. Particular care shall be taken to protect pipe ends at any time actual laying is not in progress. C. Poly pigs shall be installed in the lines as indicated on the plans. The pigs shall be "run" through the lines and exited as indicated prior to pressure testing, chlorinating, obtaining the safe water sample and making the final tie-in. C. Procedure: When the entire pipe line or selected sections thereof have been completed the line or section shall be disinfected according to the following procedures: 1. Cleaning: Cleaning shall be accomplished by flushing the dead end sections of all water lines. a. After cleaning and flushing, an analysis shall be made on a water sample drawn from a sampling point. b. Should the analysis indicate that the bacteria count is above the limits of the established standards of purity, the system shall be sterilized by the Contractor in accordance with the following method. 2. Sterilization: When the entire pipe line or certain selected sections thereof have been completed, tested, and made ready for turning over to Owner ready for use, the line or section of line shall be thoroughly sterilized according to the following procedure. a. The line shall be flushed out, completely replacing its entire volume with water from City mains. b. Chlorine will be injected into the section of line being sterilized so that its entire capacity will be filled with water containing chlorine in the amount of 50 p.p.m. The sterilizing agent shall be introduced at one end of the section and the water released from the opposite end until the sterilizing agent is present at the discharge end in such quantity as to indicate a residual chlorine of 50 p.p.m. or as otherwise determined by the Architect/Engineer. All valves shall then be closed and the sterilizing solution permitted to remain in the pipe line section for not less than twenty-four (24) hours. C. At the end of the sterilizing period, the sterilizing solution shall be discharged from the pipe and replaced with City water direct from a City main. WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 4219 02665 - 3 r - 4219 d. A sample of water from the sterilized main shall be taken from a suitable tap under the supervision of the Architect/Engineer or his inspector and submitted to the City Chemist or the State Health Department for analysis. If the test shows a satisfactory quality of water, the line so sterilized may then be placed in service. If the sample shows unsatisfactory quality of water, the process of sterilization shall be repeated until a satisfactory water is obtained. D. Pressure Test: After the pipe has been laid and backfilled, each valved section of newly laid pipe shall be subjected to a pressure test by raising the pressure in the pipe to 150 psi at the low point of the test section. The duration of each pressure test shall be four (4) hours. 1. Tests shall be made against valves when available, or by placing temporary plugs and bulkheads in the pipe, and filling the line slowly with water, Care shall be used to see that all air vents are open during the filling. After the line, or section thereof, has been completely filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight pressure for at least forty-eight (48) hours to allow the lining to absorb what water it will and to allow the escape of air from any air pockets. During this period, the bulkheads, valves, manholes, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If any are found, these shall be stopped or, in the case of valves in the main line or bulkheads, provision shall be made for measuring the leakage during the test. The water necessary to maintain the test pressure shall be measured through a meter or by other means satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment and make tests at his expense. 2. Before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. In the event it is necessary to expel air from high points other than where air valves are provided, the Contractor may tap the line for this purpose and afterwards tightly plug the tap. 3. During the last two hours of the test, the entire route of the pipe line shall be inspected to locate any leaks or breaks. Any defective joints, cracked or defective pipe, fittings, or valves discovered in consequence of this pressure test shall be removed and replaced with sound material and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. Any and all noticeable leaks shall be repaired regardless of whether the actual leakage is within the allowable. END OF SECTION WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 02665 - 4 I SECTION 02675 WATER METER INSTALLATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL �* 1.01 SCOPE: This section coverswater meter installations for both domestic and irrigation water systems. This section also covers appurtenant double check assemblies and meter boxes, etc., and the detector check valves and trim meters required on the fire protection lines. Additionally, any specific requirements by the City of Lubbock pertaining to meters shall apply and are considered covered in this section. The Contractor shall contact the City Water Meter Department to be fully informed of all requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Section 02515 - Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling. B. Section 02665 - Water Supply System. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit to the Architect/Engineer in conformance with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Water Meter Assemblies: For domestic water service combination meters consisting ofturbo- meters with low flow by-pass meters shall be installed. For irrigation service a turbo -meter shall be installed. Sizes shall be as shown on the plans. The meters shall be obtained from the City of Lubbock Water Meter Department. Meter boxes shall be concrete or plastic as indicated on the plan details and shall be of suitable size to house the meters and the pipe coupling and shall permit ease of maintenance and removal. The entire meter assembly includes meters, strainer, couplings, wall sleeves, elbows, pipe, box and all other appurtenances indicated on the plan details. B. Double Check Assemblies: For both domestic water service and irrigation water services, double check assemblies shall be installed after the meter assemblies. The double check, double gates shall be of the sizes shown on the plans and shall be Clayton D Double Check Valve assembly as manufactured by Cla-Val Co., of Newport Beach, California, or an approved equal. Housing boxes shall be concrete or plastic as indicated on the plan details and shall be of suitable size to house the valves and pipe couplings, and shall permit ease of maintenance, testing and removal. The entire assembly includes valves, coupling, wall sleeves, elbows, pipe, box and all other appurtenances indicated on the plan details. C. Detector Check and Meter: For fire protection lines detector check with trim meter shall be installed. The size shall be full line size detector checks as indicated on the plan details with small trim or by-pass meters and appropriate small meter box. The detector check and meter shall be obtained from the City of Lubbock Water Meter Department. WATER METER INSTALLATIONS 4219 02675 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION P" 3.01 INSTALLATION: The Contractor shall purchase all meters and the detector check from the City of Lubbock Water Meter Department. All materials shall be installed as detailed and shall be fully tested in accordance with City of Lubbock requirements. END OF SECTION n WATER METER INSTALLATIONS 4219 02675 - 2 I SECTION 02685 SANITARY SEWER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: The work to be performed under this section of the specifications shall consist of furnishing and installing sanitary sewer mains and service lines to points indicated outside all proposed building structures to which service is required. Additionally, the Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Construction, City of Lubbock, shall apply for all sewer line construction on this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Section 02515 - Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit to the Architect/Engineer in conformance with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract. y PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: All PVC plastic pipe furnished on this project shall meet the requirements of ASTM Standard D 1784, "Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Compounds," and ASTM Standard D 3034 (SDR-26), "Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings," latest revisions. Pipe and fitting markings shall include appropriate ASTM Designations and Cell Classification Numbers (12454-B or 12454- C or other approved classifications). Pipe and fittings not so marked will be rejected. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, pipe lengths shall bejoined utilizing elastomeric gaskets as referenced in D 3034, and shall be tested per the requirements of ASTM Standard D 3212, "Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals." B. Fittings: All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and spigot configurations identical to that of the pipe. Coupling adapters shall be used to tie into existing pipe for any service lines and at manholes. C. Acetone Immersion Test: After two (2) hours immersion in a sealed container of anhydrous (99.5% pure) acetone, a one (1") inch long sample ring shall show no visible spalling or cracking. (Swelling or softening is not a failure when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2152.) D. Manholes: Manholes for sanitary sewer lines shall be precast reinforced concrete manhole conforming to ASTM Designation C478 (C478M). Manholes shall be constructed as detailed on the plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION AND DEFLECTION TESTING: A. Pipe shall be installed in full compliance with the recommended practice for "Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe," ASTM Standard D 2321. Pipe shall be installed in an "envelope" of crushed stone or washed gravel as defined per the detail on the plans. Crushed stone or washed gravel shall conform to Gradation Size No. 7 as defined in ASTM C 33. Generally, this gradation requires that ninety (90%) to one hundred (100%) SANITARY SEWER 4219 02685 - 1 I percent pass a one-half (1/") inch sieve and that zero (0%) to fifteen (15%) percent pass a No. 4 sieve. B. Laying pipe shall not begin until the excavation of the trench has been completed as specified herein, after the initial embedment has been placed in the trench and after the condition of trench, line, and grade have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. C. Pipe shall be laid from a line carefully set for line and grade and approved by the Architect/Engineer and shall be laid with the bell or collar upgrade, beginning at an existing opening, unless otherwise approved by the Arch itect/Engineer; and in any event shall be laid with the bell or collar away from the last section placed. D. Each pipe section shall have a uniform bearing on the subgrade of crushed rock or concrete embedment for the full length of the pipe barrel and body of the fitting. Adjustments to line and grade shall be made by scraping away or filling in with crushed stone or concrete and not by wedging or blocking up the bell. All pipe shall be laid in the dry, regardless of the type of joint used. 6 E. Pipe and fitting sockets and barrel shall be clean and free from dirt at the time of jointing. The pipes shall be tightly butted together to form a watertightjoint and markings on the spigot end shall indicate the joint in proper position by one mark being inside the bell and one mark outside. F. When the pipe has been checked for line and grade, the body of the pipe shall be backfilled with stone, granular material or concrete, as shown in the plans, on both sides to hold the pipe firmly in position. G. Openings at the end of day's work, openings in wyes and tees, deep cut connections, laterals, cleanouts, etc., shall be capped and sealed water -tight. H. PVC pipe wyes, tees and connections of the sizes indicated shall be installed at the locations designated on the plans, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. I. In addition to the construction and testing procedures outlined in other sections of the specifications, the Contractor shall be required to install the pipe in such a manner so that the diametric deflection of the pipe shall not exceed five (5%) percent and the materials surrounding the pipe shall be compacted to the required Standard Proctor Densities outlined in D 2321. The area requiring compaction shall include the bed and side fill material and also the material placed above the pipe for a distance of six (6") inches to twelve (12") inches over the top of the pipe. The Owner may require up to ten (10) random compaction tests to be completed by an independent laboratory. If any of these tests indicate that the material has not been compacted to the required density, the Contractor shall recompact said material at no additional cost to the Owner, and the Owner shall then have the right to require additional compaction tests to insure that this or other material is compacted to the proper density without any additional cost to the Owner. J. The deflection shall be measured by pulling a cylinder, sphere, or other acceptable measuring device through the pipe. Vertical deflection test shall be performed on one hundred (100%) percent of the total footage of flexible conduit on the project. Each test section shall not be less than two (200) feet or more than six hundred (600') feet long. The Contractor shall conduct the tests under the observation of the Architect/Engineer and shall furnish all test equipment and labor for conducting the test. Prior to testing, the procedures and equipment to be used for this test shall be submitted to the Owner for review and approval. A SANITARY SEWER 4219 02685 - 2 n es*, r K. Exfiltration Testing: Exfiltration tests shall be made on the entire line after installation and shall not exceed two hundred fifty (250) gallons per inch of diameter per mile of pipe. The line may be tested in convenient sections in the following manner: 1. The line and manholes shall be filled with water and allowed to stand for such time as is required for the pipe and manholes to absorb such water as it will and for escape of all air from the line. The line shall be filled with water to a depth in the upper manhole of five (5') feet above the crown of the sewer. Measurement shall be made of the quantity of water required to maintain the water level in the manhole. Manholes shall be considered as sections of pipe of equal length and diameter and tests shall be maintained on each reach for at least twenty-four (24) hours. END OF SECTION SECTION 02700 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior portland cement concrete paving for the following: 1. Fire lanes. 2. Sidewalks. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 2. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3. Section 07920 -Sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, joint systems, curing compounds, dry -shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect/Engineer. C. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. D. Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design tests. E. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Arch itect/Engineer. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying thateach material item complies with or exceeds requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete Standards: Comply with provisions of the following standards, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 4219 02700 - 1 0 A•, B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Concrete Testing Service: The Owner shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materials evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. D. Field -Constructed Mockup: Cast mockup of size indicated or as required to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. When Architect/Engineer determines that mockup does not meet requirements, demolish and remove it from the site and cast another until the mockup is accepted. 2. Keep accepted mockup undisturbed during construction as a standard for judging completed paving. Undamaged mockup may be incorporated into the Work. r^^ 3. Demolish accepted mockup and remove from site when directed by Architect/Engineer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood, or other acceptable panel -type materials to provide full -depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100-foot or less radius. B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form -release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. C. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type or plastic -type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. Do not use wood, brick, or other unacceptable materials. 2.3. CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect/Engineer. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 4219 02700 - 2 W ` C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4, and as follows. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch. 2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect/Engineer. D. Water: Potable. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. [Four (4%) to six (6%) percent.] C. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: -y 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: i a. Air-Tite or Amex 210; Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Air -Mix or Perma-Air; Euclid Chemical Co. C. Darex AEA or Daravair; W.R. Grace & Co. d. MB-VR or Micro -Air; Master Builders, Inc. e. Sealtight AEA; W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. Sika AER; Sika Corp. !" 2. Water -Reducing Admixture: a. Chemtard; ChemMasters Corp. ^, b. Type A Series; Cormix Construction Chemicals. C. Eucon WR-75; Euclid Chemical Co. d. WRDA; W.R. Grace & Co. e. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed; Master Builders, Inc. �* f. Metco W.R.; Metalcrete Industries. g. Plastocrete 161; Sika Corp. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS .�. A. Clear Solvent -Borne Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A or B, wax free. B. Clear Waterborne Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g1L. C. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film -forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 4219 02700 - 3 ZZI r D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Clear Solvent -Borne Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: a. Clear Cure; Anti -Hydro Co., Inc. b. Spartan -Cote; The Burke Co. C. All Resin; Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. d. Sealco 309; Cormix Construction Chemicals. e. Day -Chem Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corp. f. Diamond Clear; Euclid Chemical Co. g. #64 Resin Cure -Clear; Lambert Corp. h. L&M Cure R; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. Masterkure; Master Builders, Inc. j. 3100 Series; W.R. Meadows, Inc. k. Seal N Kure; Metalcrete Industries. I. Kure-N-Seal; Sonneborn-Chemrex. M. Horn Clear Seal; Tamms/A.C. Horn. Y i -a 2. Clear Waterborne Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: �-+ a. Clear Cure Water Base; Anti -Hydro Co., Inc. k b. Spartan Cote WB; The Burke Co. C. W.B. Resin Cure; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. d. Sealco VOC; Cormix Construction Chemicals. e. Safe Cure and Seal (J-18); Dayton Superior Corp. f. Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co. g. Aqua Kure -Clear; Lambert Corp. h. Dress & Seal #22 WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. Masterkure 100W; Master Builders, Inc. j. 1100 Clear Series; W.R. Meadows, Inc. k. Metcure; Metalcrete Industries. I. Kure-N-Seal WB; Sonneborn-Chemrex. M. Horncure 100; Tamms/A.C. Horn. 3. Evaporation Control: K > a. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co. C. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc. e. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: Acrylic or styrene butadiene. B. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit requirements. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Bonding Agent: a. Acrylic Bondcrete; The Burke Co. b. Strongbond; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING " 4219 02700 - 4 r 9 C. Day -Chem Ad Bond (J-40); Dayton Superior Corp. d. SBR Latex; Euclid Chemical Co. e. Daraweld C; W.R. Grace & Co. f. Everbond; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. g. Acryl-Set; Master Builders Inc. h. Intralok; W.R. Meadows, Inc. i. Acrylpave; Metalcrete Industries. j. Sonocrete; Sonneborn-Chemrex. k. Stonlock LB2; Stonhard, Inc. i. Strong Bond; Symons Corp. 2. Epoxy Adhesive: a. Burke Epoxy M.V.; The Burke Co. b. Spec -Bond 100; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. C. Resi-Bond (J-58); Dayton Superior. d. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620; Euclid Chemical Co. e. Concresive Standard Liquid; Master Builders, Inc. f. Rezi-Weld 1000; W.R. Meadows, Inc. g. Metco Hi -Mod Epoxy; Metalcrete Industries. h. Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod; Sika Corp. i. R-600 Series; Symons Corp. j. Epoxtite Binder 2390; Tamms/A.C. Horn, Inc. 2.7 CONCRETE MIX 4219 A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal -weight concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 1. Do not use the Owner's field quality -control testing agency as the independent testing agency. 2. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent of cement content by weight. B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal -weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28-Day): 3,000 psi. 2. Maximum Water -Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit at Point of Placement: 4 inches. C. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent: 1. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 1-inch maximum aggregate. D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02700 - 5 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART B - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION r-r A. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing ,Y concrete. ,.., 3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. d 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure i separation from concrete without damage. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement. r� B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond -reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. 3.4 JOINTS P" A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise. 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless indicated otherwise. �^�++ II PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 4219 02700 - 6 B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 of the r� concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into hardened concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before development of random contraction cracks. Joints shall be sawed as soon as sawing can be performed without stripping aggregate from the concrete, generally within eighteen (18) to twenty-four (24) hours after placement. C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than 112 hour, unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway -section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless indicated otherwise. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving unless indicated. 3. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 4. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. D. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1 /2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface. 2. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 3. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. E. Installation of joint fillers and sealants is specified in Section 07920 - Caulking and Sealants. F. Install dowel bars and support assemblies atjoints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt -coat one half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. r 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT k A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcing before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on surfaces that are frozen. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment. PM PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 4219 02700 - 7 ii D. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. 1. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. F. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. H. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength. J. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. K. Hot -Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot weather conditions exist. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 4219 02700 - 8 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Refer to Section 03345 - Concrete Finishing, B. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. A Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 3/8 inch. 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation -control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating. C. Begin curing afterfinishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture -retaining -cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with a 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A. The Contractor shall employ a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include the following: 1. Sampling .Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive - strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 4219 02700 - 9 I Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive - strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air -entrained concrete. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive -strength specimens. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive -strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens except when field -cured test specimens are required. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required. B. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect/Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. 3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 4219 A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect/Engineerwhen necessaryto determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Thoroughly clean concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02700 - 10 t ; SECTION 02830 GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: This section covers the furnishing of all labor and materials necessary to install the chain link fencing as shown on the plans. *+ 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Shop drawings shall be furnished on all fencing and gates to be installed, and the Contractor shall submit samples of each component part of the various fencing if so required by the ` Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRIC: r A. All chain link fabric shall be zinc or aluminum coated steel wire with a minimum tensile strength of 75,000 psi. 1. Zinc -coated: Minimum 1.2 ounces of zinc coating per square foot of coated surface area (ASTM A392). 2. Aluminum -coated: Minimum 0.40 ounces of aluminum coating per square foot of coated surface area (ASTM A491). B. Fabric shall be helically wound and interwoven into a diamond mesh in the following gauges and mesh sizes determined by measuring the clear distance between parallel sides of the mesh. Site Fencing No. 9 gauge - 2" mesh Backstop No. 6 gauge - 2" mesh (where called for on the plans) C. All fabric shall have knuckled top and bottom selvage. D. The Contractor shall submit a manufacturer's certified test result that the zinc and aluminum coatings meet specified standards. 2.02 POSTS: A. All fence posts shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe. B. Terminal posts shall be defined as end, pull, corner, and line posts defined as the vertical posts installed between terminal posts. C. All posts shall be hot -dip zinc coated on all surfaces after fabrication with a minimum of 1.8 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface area, conforming to ASTM A120. D. All posts shall conform to the following sizes as called for on the plans: 6" o.d. 18.97 lbs. per foot 4" o.d. 9.11 lbs. per foot 3" o.d. 6.83 lbs. per foot E. Spacing for line posts shall be as shown on the plans. GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING 4219 02830 - 1 0 I F. All exposed ends of fence posts shall be fitted with a formed steel, malleable iron, or aluminum hot -dip galvanized alloy cap. All line posts shall be fitted with a cap suitable for passage of the continuous top rail. All terminal posts shall be capped with a domed terminal top. 2.03 RAILS: A. All chain link fencing shall have a 1-5/8" o.d. (2.27 lbs. per foot), continuous top rail. Outside sleeve -type couplings 7" long, spaced at 20' maximum intervals, of the same material as the rail shall be used to allow for expansion and contraction. Every fifth coupling shall have a spring to take up rail expansion or contraction. B. Intermediate and bottom rails will be installed as shown on the plans and attached to the line and terminal posts with galvanized end, corner, and line rail clamps. C. All rails shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe hot -dip zinc coated after fabrication with a minimum of 1.8 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface area. 2.04 WIRE TIES: Wire ties shall be used to attach fence fabric to rails and line posts. Wire tie gauge size shall not be less than gauge of the fence fabric. Spacing for wire ties along rails shall not be greater than 24" and shall not exceed 15" when attaching to line posts. Ties shall be aluminum or zinc coated steel. 2.05 TENSION BARS: All fence fabric shall be tied to terminal posts with tension bars and tension bands. All tension bars shall be galvanized steel strip %" thick and 3/" wide. Tension bar shall be threaded through the chain link fabric and attached to the terminal post with I" wide, No. 11 gauge, tension bands at 15" intervals or less. Tension bands shall be closed with a 3/s" x 1 %" galvanized carriage bolt and nut. 2.06 TRUSS RODS: Where shown on the plans a three -eighths (3/8") inch diameter galvanized steel truss rod and tightener will be installed between the terminal post and the adjacent line posts. 2.07 FITTINGS: All fittings to be hot -dip zinc coated malleable cast iron or pressed steel conforming to ASTM A153. Hot -dip zinc coating shall be 1.2 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated area. 2.08 CONCRETE POST FOOTINGS: All concrete used shall conform to Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION: All fencing shall be installed by skilled and experienced fence erectors to the lines and grades shown on the drawings. Some fence posts and footings have been installed by others. 3.02 COORDINATION: Fence erectors shall coordinate work with the concrete subcontractor for the placement and location of fence post footings and the void forms. Fence post erectors shall coordinate with the Owner and General Contractor in locating all existing underground utilities prior to drilling holes for fence post footings. 3.03 FABRIC: All fabric shall be placed on the inside of the balifield except at the dugouts where fabric on the back and sides shall be placed on the outside. 3.04 FABRIC CLEARANCE: All fence fabric shall have a one-half to three -fourths (%2'3/4') inch clearance from the bottom of the fence fabric to the finish grade. Fence fabric shall extend above the top of top rail no more than one (1") inch. GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING 4219 02830 - 2 r�* w.,. 3.05 CLEANUP: Upon completion of the fence installation, any splattered concrete shall be removed from fence posts, all wire ties and fence hardware shall be picked up, and all excess fence fabric and equipment removed from the construction site. END OF SECTION PPR b. sm p: rrw GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING 4219 02830 - 3 F. SECTION 02900 TREE PLANTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This work includes all final fine grading and minor leveling of planting areas, soil preparation, and planting. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required as herein specified and indicated on the drawings. Refer to planting details on plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. B. Section 02970 - Irrigation. C. Section 02930 - Turf Grass Planting. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Comply with applicable federal, state, county, and local regulations governing landscape materials and work. B. Employ only experienced personnel familiar with required work. Provide adequate supervision by qualified foremen. C. Substitutions: Do not make plant material substitutions. If required landscape material is not - . obtainable, submit proof of non-availabilityto Owners Representative, togetherwith proposal for use of equivalent material. At the time bids are submitted, the Contractor is assumed to have located the materials necessary to complete the job as specified. There will be no additional cost to the Owner for substitutions past bid opening. D. Provide quantity, size, genus, species, and variety of trees, shrubs, ornamental grasses and groundcover indicated and scheduled for landscape work and complying with applicable requirements of ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock." I^4 E. All ornamental grasses must be nursery grown, asexually propagated stock, unless otherwise approved by the Landscape Architect. F. Measurements: Measure trees with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements six inches above ground a . for trees up to and including 4° caliper size, and twelve inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of all plant material of height and spread dimensions, do not measure �** from branch or root tip -to -tip. G. Inspection: Plants shall be approved by the Landscape Architect before planting, for compliance with requirementfor genus, species, variety, size, and quality. One representative shrub, ornamental grass, perennial, and groundcover for each genus, species and variety shall be submitted for approval by Landscape Architect before planting occurs. Every canopy and accenttree shall be approved by Landscape Architect before planting occurs. Landscape Architect retains right to further inspect plants for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective materials at any time during progress of work. The Contractor shall remove rejected plant TREE PLANTING 4219 02900 - 1 Ai materials immediately from project site and replace with acceptable material at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Certification: Submit certificates of inspection as may be required by governing e authorities to accompany shipments. For standard products, submit manufacturer's certified analysis. For other materials, submit analysis by a recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by Association of Official Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable. B. Planting Schedule: Submit proposed planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type planting. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work during entire year. Submit prior to expiration of required maintenance period. D. Material Sources: Submit to Owner's Representative, a list of all plant materials, plant representatives as mentioned in Item 1.03, G., and their source. This list shall be submitted three days after Notice to Proceed. 1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Delivery of Trees: Do not prune prior to delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect. Provide adequate protection of root systems from drying winds and sun. Do not bend or bind - tie trees in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Any tree in full leaf will be sprayed with anti - desiccant prior to delivery. B. Deliver trees after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plant materials and trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist: C. Do not remove container grown stock from containers before time of planting. E. While awaiting planting do not store any plant materials on concrete, asphalt or any surfaces which reflect large amounts of heat during storage. Prior to planting shrubs, 1 gallon and 4" container plants must be shaded and not allowed to dry out. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Timing: Tree planting shall not take place June through August. A planting schedule shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect for approval. B. Coordination with Lawns: Protect existing lawn areas to the greatest extent practical during construction. Seed all areas disturbed during construction with approved grass. C. Irrigation System: The proposed irrigation system must be complete in all respects and must be completely operational before planting may begin. After planting, any breakdowns in the irrigation system attributable to warranty items must be immediately repaired by the Contractor. Otherwise, the cost of replacing lost plantings caused by the Contractor's failure to promptly repair the irrigation system will be fully borne by the Contractor. TREE PLANTING 4219 02900 - 2 1.07 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A. Warranty all plant materials for a period of one year after date of final acceptance against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, but excepting defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond Landscape Installer's control. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Native Topsoil: Existing topsoil shall be screened io omit rocks and rock chips over'/i' diameter, as well as trash, vegetation, and debris at the site will be used. If sufficient quantities of onsite topsoil are not available, offsite sources may be used, upon approval by the Landscape Architect. (Refer to Section 02200 - Earthwork) 2.02 SOIL AMENDMENTS TO EXISTING TOPSOIL A. Compost: Shall be decomposed, organic material composed of twenty (20%) percent animal manure and eighty (80%) percent vegetative material, or other approved formulation. This material shall have been composted at least nine (9) months and shall be free of fungus, grass, weed seed, debris, nut sedge tubers, and any toxic substances, as produced by Soil Building Systems, Inc., Dallas, Texas; Living Earth Technologies, Inc., Dallas, Texas; or approved equal. B. Rock Powder: Shall be lava sand. C. Fertilizer: Shall be a one hundred (100%) percent organic based product containing the following minimum percentages of available nutrients (N-P-K) 6-3-3 such as Sustain, Garden-ville Soil Food, or Green Sense. D. Root Stimulator: Shall be liquid seaweed (kelp). E. Liquid Soil Conditioner: Shall act as a catalyst to activate soil nutrients and fertilizers, to improve soil texture and to promote water percolation through the soil. Conditioner shall be Nitron A-35 or approved equal. F. Weed Controller: Shall be"Round-up" as manufactured by Monsanto, Inc. orapproved equal. G. Contractor shall supply the Landscape Architect with copies of the invoices and delivery tickets for all soil amendments. H. Sample and Specification Submittal: Submit a producer's specification and a one (1) quart sample of each soil amendment proposed to be used for the Owner's approval. 2.03 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Provide container grown plant materials, except as otherwise indicated, grown in a recognized nurseryin accordancewith good horticultural practice, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide only healthy stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement. Trunks will be centered in root ball. Pruning cuts larger than %" will be cause for rejection of plant material. As mentioned in Item 1.03, E., all ornamental grasses must be nursery grown, asexually propagated stock, unless otherwise approved by the Landscape Architect. If Contractor proves that container grown trees of the specified type and size are TREE PLANTING 4219 02900 - 3 4219 unavailable the Landscape Architect may approved balled and burlapped stock or make substitutions. B. Plant Name and Location: The names and locations of all plants are noted in the drawings. The nomenclature of all plant materials is per Hortus Third by L. H. Bailey. Plant materials not conforming with these two references will be rejected by the Landscape Architect. C. Quality and Size: All plant materials shall be first class representatives of their normal species or variety unless otherwise specified. They shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and shall be healthy, shapely, well -rooted, and vigorous. All plant materials shall be free from insect pests, plant diseases, and injuries. The containers and balls of all plants delivered to the site shall be free from any weeds or grasses which could be considered noxious or objectionable; i.e., nutgrass or Johnsongrass. ALL PLANT MATERIALS SHALL PLAN WHICH ARE THE MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE SIZES. They shall be measured after pruning with the branches in normal position. The requirements for measurement, branching, grading, quality, balling and burlapping of plants specified generally follow the code of the standards currently recommended by the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., in the American Standards for Nursery Stock. D. Label at least one tree of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. E. Where formal arrangements of consecutive order of trees are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and label with number to assure symmetry in planting. F. Rejection of Plants: Owner shall approve plants prior to planting. Plant material having any of the following features, but not limited to, will be subject to rejection: 1. An excessive amount of abrasions of the bark. 2. Dried or damaged root system. 3. Dried or damaged top wood of deciduous plants, or dried or damaged foliage and top wood of evergreens. 4. Prematurely opened or damaged buds. 5. Disease or insect infestation, including eggs or larvae. 6. Dry, loose, cracked, broken, and/or undersized balls or containers which do not conform to the sizes shown on the plans. 7. Evidence of heating, molding, freezing, wind burn, sun scald, etc. 8. Container plants that are overgrown or root -bound. 9. Plants with bench balls (roots repacked with soil). 10. Plant balls encased in nonbiodegradable plastic or other impervious material. 11. Field grown or collected plants transplanted into containers less than six (6) months. 12. Trees which have damaged, pruned, crooked, malformed, or multiple leaders, unless multiple leaders are specified or are normal for the species. 13. Plants with disfiguring knots or fresh cuts of limbs over one inch that have not completely calloused. 14. Plants that do not possess a normal balance between height and spread for the species. 15. Plant containers that are not structurally sound (cracked, bent, etc.). 16. Plants in containers with less than three -fourths (3/) planting medium depth. 17. Any other physical damage or adverse conditions thatwould preventthriving growth or cause an unacceptable appearance. 18. Plants that do not meet the standards shown on the plans. TREE PLANTING 02900 - 4 i r i 2.04 DECIDUOUS TREES A. Provide trees of height and caliper indicated. B. Where shade trees are required, provide single stem trees with straight trunk and intact leader. C. Where small trees of upright or spreading type are required, provide trees with single stem, branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, and with relationship of caliper and branching recommended byANSI Z60.1, unless otherwise indicated on landscape plans. 2.05 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTAINER GROWN STOCK A. General: Provide healthy, vigorous, well -rooted plant materials established in container in which they are sold. Provide balled and burlapped stock, when required trees exceed maximum size recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for container grown stock. B. Established container stock is defined as a tree grown in or transplanted into a container and grown in the container for a length of time sufficient to develop new fibrous roots, so that root mass will retain its shape and hold together when removed from container. C. Containers: Use rigid containers which will hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping. Provide trees established in containers of not less than minimum sizes recommended by ANSI X60.1 for kind, type, and size of trees required. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 4219 A. Mulch: Provide shredded cypress bark mulch, medium texture, having a particle size that passes 100% through a V square mesh and is retained on a 1/s" square mesh, to be submitted for approval by Owner's Representative. Moisten at the time of application to prevent wind displacement. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Stakes and Guys: Provide stakes of 6' steel fence "T" posts, painted dark green or 2" x 2" x 6' hardwood stakes free of knots and deformities. Provide deadmen of sound new hardwood, redwood, or treated softwood free of knot holes and other defects. Provide wire ties and guys of 2-strand, twisted, pliable galvanized iron wire not lighter than 12 gauge. Provide rubber or plastic hose not less than'h" in diameter cut to required length to protect tree trunks from damage by wires. 2. Fertilizer tablets shall be slow -release type with potential acidity of not more than 5% by weight containing the following percentages of nutrients by weight: 2% Nitrogen, 10% Phosphoric Acid, 5% Potash. Submit samples along with manufacturer's guaranteed analysis and application recommendations. 3. Planting Fertilizer: Pelleted or granular slow release form shall consist of the following percents by weight and shall be mixed by a commercial fertilizer supplier, Composition: 15% Nitrogen, 5% Phosphorus, 10% Potash and shall include sulfur, iron, and other trace elements. 4. All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation shall be selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. TREE PLANTING 02900 - 5 ii I 5. Post Emergent Herbicide: "Round up" or approved equal. 6. Drip Irrigation Bags shall be Treegator 20 gal. reinforced plastic bags designed to provide drip irrigation to newly planted trees, (806) 799-3646. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TREE PLANTING A. Cooperate with other contractors and trades working in and adjacent to landscape work areas. Examine drawings which show development of entire site and become familiar with scope of other work required. B. Layout individual tree locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Landscape Architect's acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor adjustments as may be requested by Landscape Architect. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate pits, beds, and trenches according to drawings with vertical but "rough" sides. •* Leave soil in bottom of pit undisturbed. Avoid creating smooth or "glazed" sides of pit. Do not excavate tree pits until preliminary approval has been obtained from the Owner's Representative. B. Dispose of unsuitable subsoil removed from landscape excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill. C. Utilities: Notify utility companies of planting schedule and have existing utilities field located prior to excavating. Notify Owner's Representative of potential conflicts. D. Obstructions: If rock, underground construction, or other obstructions are encountered in excavation for planting of trees, notify Landscape Architect. New locations may be selected by Owner's Representative, or change order may be issued to direct removal of obstructions to depth of not less than 6" below required planting depth upon approval by the Owner. E. Drainage: Test planting pits for adequate percolation. If subsoil conditions indicate retention of water in planting areas, or if seepage or other evidence indicating presence of underground water exists, notify Owner's Representative before backfilling. A change order may be issued to direct installation of drain tile or other measures beyond drainage requirement indicated upon approval by the Owner. F. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out before setting trees. 3.02 PREPARATION OF EXISTING TOPSOIL FOR TREE PLANTING A. Existing topsoil where stated on landscape plans will be used for tree planting. B. Before mixing and placing, clean existing topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth, and dispose of off site. Use only existing soil from the site as backfill. TREE PLANTING 4219 02900 - 6 4 C. Tree Planting Pits: 1. Planting Pits: After scarifying, the planting pits shall be excavated. All tree pits shall be a minimum of thirty-six (36") inches larger in diameter and six (6") inches deeper than the tree ball or root spread. 2. Soil Mix: Backfill the lower 2/3 of planting pits with existing soil. Soil mix for backfilling the upper 1/3 of the tree planting pits shall be pre -mixed and shall consist of one-third (1/3) compost and two-thirds (2/3) topsoil. D. Setting and Backfilling: 1. Set plant stock on undisturbed soil, plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball 1 "-2" above finished landscape grades. Remove burlap from top of root -ball but do not remove from sides or under root -ball. Remove any nylon, plastic, or wire materials completely. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use stock if ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. When set, place specified backfill around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing final layer or backfill. E. Fertilizer tablets shall be placed in the top 3" of the plant pit at the rate of four tablets per every foot of root -ball diameter per tree, or per manufacturer's recommendations. F. Set container grown stock as specified for balled and burlapped stock, except remove container before setting. Carefully remove cover and sides of wooden boxes after partial backfilling so as not to damage root -balls. G. Construct water retention basin as directed in plans, at least 4" high and twice the diameter of the root -ball. H. Mulch pits, trenches, and planted areas. Provide a 2" layer of mulch on top of the root -ball. Do not place mulch against trunk of tree. Unless otherwise directed by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches. Any pruning shall be in accordance with standard horticultural practices. Guy and stake trees immediately after planting. If after pruning, the plant has become misshapen or changed in appearance, the plant will be rejected. J. Stake trees of 2" or greater caliper. Stake trees of less than 2" caliper only as required to prevent wind "tip -out." Use stakes required to penetrate at least 24" below grade and to extend to at least 4' above grade. Set stakes vertical and outside of planting pit in undisturbed soil. Support trees with two strands of wire encased in hose sections at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid "rigid" restraint of tree. Provide not less than two stakes for trees 10' to 12' high and less than 2" in caliper except not less than two shorter stakes may be used for low -branches trees. Use not less than three stakes for trees over 12' high and more than 3" caliper size. Space stakes equally around trees. K. Place a Treegator bag at each tree and water the tree regularly until final acceptance. TREE PLANTING 4219 02900 - 7 i 3.03 BED PREPARATION A. Planting areas shall be dug and specified soil fully prepared, graded, and made ready to receive the plants before delivery of plant materials. After planting, all beds shall be one (1") inch above finished grade to allow for settling. B. Shrub, Ornamental Grass, Perennial and Groundcover Planting Areas: 1. Areas specified as native topsoil: a. Standard Soil Mix: Following the scarifying of the soil, there shall be an application of compost at the rate of six (6) cubic yards per thousand (1,000) square feet of area and sharp sand at the rate of three (3) cubic yards per thousand (1,000) square feet of area, evenly distributed and rototilled thoroughly into the soil to a six (6") inch depth (2" compost, 1" sand into 6" topsoil). b. Fertilizer: Just prior to mixing soil, apply organic base fertilizer with an analysis of 5-10-5 and sulphur soil at the rate of forty (40 lbs.) pounds of each material per one thousand (1,000) square feet. C. Shrub Planting Pits: 1. All shrub pits shall be a minimum of six (6") inches larger in diameter and three (3") inches deeper than the shrub ball or root spread. 2. Soil Mix: Backfill the lower 2/3 of planting pits with existing soil. Soil mix for backfilling shall be pre -mixed and shall consist of one-fourth (%4) compost and three -fourths ('/) topsoil. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain all trees, shrubs, ornamental grasses, perennials and groundcover until final acceptance by Owner. Prune, water, cultivate, and weed as required for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees to proper grades or vertical position as required. Spray as required to keep trees free of insects and disease. B. Plants shall be in good, healthy, and disease -free condition. All planted areas shall be free of weeds and debris before site is accepted by Owner. Guarantee period shall begin on date project is accepted by Owner. 3.05 WARRANTY PERIOD AND REPLACEMENT A. Remove and replace trees found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during the warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace plant materials which do not meet the specifications for health and appearance, as determined by Landscape Architect at end of warranty period; unless, in opinion of Landscape Architect, it is advisable to extend warranty period for an additional full growing season. B. Replace, without cost to Owner, and as soon as weather conditions permit, all dead plants ,..s and all plants not in vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by the Owner's Representative during and at the end of Warranty Period. Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, and shall bear foliage of a normal density, size, and color. TREE PLANTING 4219 02900 - 8 Replacement shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species and shall be subject to all requirements of this specification. 3.06 PROTECTION A. No heavy equipment shall be moved overthe planted areas unless the soil is again prepared, graded, leveled, and replanted. It will be the responsibility of this Contractor to protect all paving surfaces, curbs, utilities, plant materials, and any other existing improvements from damage. Any damages shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3.07 PERFORMANCE A. Establish dense areas of specified groundcover free from empty spot, lumps and depressions. Replant any part of the areas that fail to show uniform growth. 3.08 CLEANUP A. During work, keep premises neat and orderly including organization of storage areas. Remove daily, trash and debris resulting from preparation and planting as work progresses. Keep walk and driveway areas clean by sweeping or hosing. Leave site in a broom -clean condition. Excess material or debris brought onto the site or unearthed shall be removed and disposed off site. 4219 END OF SECTION TREE PLANTING 02900 - 9 I SECTION 02930 TURFGRASS PLANTING AND MOWING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This work includes all labor, materials, and equipment for soil preparation, fertilization, planting, and other requirements regarding turfgrass planting areas shown on the plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. B. Section 02810 - Irrigation System. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Delivery Receipts and Invoices: All delivery receipts and copies of invoices for materials used for this work shall be subject to checking by the Owner or his representative and shall be subsequently delivered to the office of the Owner. B. Samples and Producers' Specifications: Various samples, certificates, and specifications of seed, fertilizer and other materials shall be submitted for approval as required by subsequent sections of this specification. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 TURFGRASS A. Ryegrass Seed: Turtgrass seed shall be Lolium multiflorum (Italian or Annual Ryegrass). The seed shall be harvested within one (1) year prior to planting and shall be free of perennial ryegrass seed, other grass seed, and weed seed to the limits allowable under the Federal Seed Act and applicable seed laws. Seed shall be at least 95% pure and shall have a 90% minimum germination rate. 1. Certificate Submittal: Prior to planting, provide the Owner or his representative with the State Certificate stating analysis of purity and germination of seed. B. Sod: Turtgrass sod shall be "Cynodon dactylon" (Common Bermudagrass). Sod shall consist of stolons, leaf blades, rhizomes, and roots with a healthy, virile system of dense, thickly matted roots throughout the soil of the sod for a thickness not less than three-quarters (3/4') inch. Sod shall be alive, healthy, vigorous, free of insects, disease, stones, and undesirable foreign materials and grasses. The grass shall have been mowed prior to sod cutting so that the height of the grass shall not exceed two (2") inches. Sod shall have been produced on growing beds of clay -loam topsoil. Sod shall not be harvested or planted when its moisture condition is so excessively wet or dry that its survival will be affected. All sod is to be harvested, delivered, and planted within a thirty-six (36) hour period of time. Sod shall be protected from exposure to wind, sun, and freezing. If sod is stacked, it shall be kept moist and shall be stacked roots -to -roots and grass -to -grass. • 1. Dimensions: All sod shall have been machine cut to uniform soil thickness of one (1") inch plus or minus one -quarter (%4") inch. All sod shall be of the same thickness. Rectangular sections of sod may vary in length, but all shall be of equal width and TURFGRASS PLANTING AND MOWING 4219 - 02930 - 1 lW of a size that permits the sod to be lifted, handled, and rolled without breaking. Broken pads and torn, uneven ends will be unacceptable. 2. Owner or his representative must approve sod at the source prior to shipment. 2.02 FERTILIZER A. General: Fertilizer shall be a commercial product, uniform in composition, free flowing, and suitable for application with approved equipment. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in fully labeled original containers. Fertilizer which has been exposed to high humidity and moisture, has become caked or otherwise damaged making it unsuitable for use, will not be acceptable. B. Initial Planting Application: Fertilizer for the initial planting application shall be a starter fertilizer with a N-P-K ratio of 4-5-1 (19-26-5) or approved equal. The phosphorus component must be derived from monoammonium phosphate to stimulate vigorous development of new roots, stolons, and rhizomes. This initial application must be applied and incorporated into the soil immediately prior to sodding or sprigging and applied immediately after seedlings begin to emerge on seeded areas. 1. Specification Submittal: Submit a sample label or specification of the fertilizer proposed to be used for the Owner's approval. C. Post Planting Application: Fertilizer for the post planting application will be a complete fertilizer of chemical base containing by weight the following percentages of nutrients: 27-3-4 +2% Fe (N-P-K) or approved equal from methylene urea or the nitrogen equivalent of 33-3-10. The application rate should provide one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. 1. Specification Submittal: Submit a sample label or specification of the fertilizer proposed to be used for the Owner's approval. 2.03 HYDROMULCH MATERIALS A. Mulch: All mulch will be manufactured from hardwoods only and will be refined specifically for turf hydromulch applications. Three approved mulches are manufactured by Conwed, Weyerhauser, and Texas Fiber Co. 1 Submittal: Submit a sample label or specification and a sample packet of the proposed mulch for the Owner's approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All turfing operations are to be executed across the slope, parallel to finished grade contours. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Athletic fields and warm-up areas must be planted to a "uniform stand" and be in satisfactory condition for acceptance by the Owner on or prior to March 15, 2001. TURFGRASS PLANTING AND MOWING 4219 02930 - 2 B. Any non athletic seed areas shall be established by April 1, 2001. C. Grass planting can proceed only after the irrigation system and fine grading, has been approved by the Owner or the Architect/Engineer. 3.03 SOIL PREPARATION A. If vegetation exists onsite, split applications of a mixture of glyphosphate (Roundup), water soluble fertilizer, and a glyphosphate accelerator such as "Scythe" shall be applied not to exceed three (3) applications. Contractor shall follow manufacturer's recommended application rates. B. Tillage: Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the soil, destroy existing vegetation, and prepare an acceptable seed/sod bed. All areas shall be tilled with a heavy duty disc or a chisel -type breaking plow, chisels set not more than ten (10") inches apart. Initial tillage shall be done in a crossing pattern for double coverage, then followed by a disc harrow. Depth of n tillage shall be five (5") inches. C. Cleaning: Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, building materials, rubbish, weeds, and stones larger than three-quarter (%") inches in diameter. If vegetation exists onsite, split applications of glyphosphate shall be applied to all existing vegetation. L .° D. Fine Grading: After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be leveled, fine graded, and drug with a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of ruts, depressions, humps, and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed before the commencement of fertilizing and planting. E. Rock Removal: During the soil preparation process, a "Rock Pick" or other approved piece of machinery shall be used to gather surface stones as small as three-quarter (%") inch in diameter. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of collected materials as waste per "Clean Up," Paragraph 3.12. 3.04 FERTILIZING A. Initial Planting Application: The specified fertilizer shall be applied at the rate of one (1) pound of actual P (phosphorus) per one thousand (1,000) square feet. This application must supply one (1) pound of phosphorus per 1,000 square feet for Bermudagrass and .5 lb. phosphorus per 1,000 square feet for Buffalograss. 7 i x,..� 4219 1. Timing: The initial planting application of fertilizer for seeded or sodded areas shall be applied after the soil preparation, but not more than two (2) days prior to turfgrass planting. Post Planting Application: Thirty (30) days after planting, turfgrass areas shall receive an application of the specified complete fertilizer at a rate of one (1) pound of actual N (nitrogen) per one thousand (1,000) square feet. 1. Timing: The Owner or his representative will determine if it is too late in the growing season for the post planting application. In the event that it is, the application shall be made in the spring of the next year, or the cost of the application may become a credit due to the Owner. 2. Post Planting Maintenance: See Paragraph 3.08. Areas without a uniform stand (complete coverage) that must be maintained later than thirty (30) days after the TURFGRASS PLANTING AND MOWING 02930 - 3 r^ initial planting shall receive subsequent applications of fertilizer, as described above, every thirty (30) days until a uniform stand is achieved. 3.05 PLANTING A. Seeding: Within two (2) days of soil preparation and initial fertilizing apply Bermuda grass ?^ seed at the rate of three (3) pounds per one thousand (1000) square feet (130 pounds per acre)/ryegrass seed at the rate of eight (8) pounds per one thousand (1000) square feet (350 pounds per acre). Seed shall be uniformly placed with a Brillion seed er-cultipacker. ' B. H dromulch Capping: Immediate) following sprigging all turf areas are to be Y PP� 9� Y 9operations, capped with wood fiber mulch, using conventional "Hydro -Mulch" equipment as manufactured by the Bowie Machine Works, or an approved equal. The hydromulch cap shall be applied at the rate of forty-six (46) pounds per one thousand (1,000) square feet (2,000 pounds per acre), using water at the rate of twenty-three (23) gallons per one thousand (1,000) square feet (1,000 gallons per acre). C. Solid Sodding: Prior to laying the sod, the planting bed shall be raked smooth to true grade and moistened to a depth of four (4") inches, but not to the extent causing puddling. The sod shall be laid smoothly, tightly butted edge to edge, and with staggered joints. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed by rolling so as to eliminate all air pockets, provide a true and even surface, and insure knitting without displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. All transitions between sod and seeded areas shall be undercut and rolled to provide a smooth, level transition. Following compaction, fine screened soil of good quality shall be used to fill all cracks between sods. Excess soil shall be worked into the grass with suitable equipment and shall be well watered. The quantity of fill soil shall be such that it will cause no smothering of the grass. 3.06 PROTECTION A. No heavy equipment shall be moved over the planted turf area unless the soil is again prepared, graded, leveled, and replanted. It will be the responsibility of this Contractor to protect all paving surfaces, curbs, utilities, plant materials, and any other existing improvements from damage. Any damages shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner. This Contractor will also locate and stake all irrigation heads, valve risers, etc., prior to beginning any soil preparation work. 3.07 IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. The proposed irrigation system must be complete in all respects and must be completely operational before turfgrass planting may begin. After planting, any breakdowns in the irrigation system attributable to warranty items must be immediately repaired by the Contractor. Otherwise, the cost of replacing the lost turf caused by the Contractor's failure to promptly repair the irrigation system will be fully borne by the Contractor. 3.08 ESTABLISHMENT AND ACCEPTANCE A. Regardlessof unseasonable climatic conditions or other adverse conditions affecting planting operations and the growth of the turfgrass, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to establish a uniform stand of turfgrass as herein specified. When adverse conditions such as drought, cold weather, high winds, excessive precipitation, or other factors prevail to such an extent that satisfactory results are unlikely, the Owner may, at his own discretion, stop any phase of the work until conditions change to favor the establishment of turfgrass. TURFGRASS PLANTING AND MOWING 4219 02930 - 4 B. A uniform stand with complete coverage of the specified grass in sprigged areas shall be defined as not less than 95% coverage in a ten foot square area. Growing plants shall be defined as healthy grass plants of two blades or more at least 1 '/z' inches tall. C. Complete coverage of sodded areas shall be defined as no visible joints showing or felt between individual sections of sod and all sections of sod must be firmly rooted to the prepared subgrade. 3.09 POST -PLANTING MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance by the Contractor shall begin immediately after each grass area is planted. All planted areas will be protected and maintained by watering, weed control, and replanting as necessary for at least thirty (30) days after initial planting and for as long as necessary to establish a UNIFORM STAND OF THE SPECIFIED GRASS and until the entire project has been accepted by the Owner. It is anticipated that a minimum of one (1) mowing will occur before the grass are accepted by the Owner. All areas which are not completely covered with the specified grass at the end of thirty (30) days will continue to be replanted and maintained '! by the Contractor until complete coverage and acceptance are achieved. B. Water: Apply at least one-half (%') inch of water over the entire planted area every three days. Contractor shall water thoroughly and infrequently once grass is established to encourage deep root growth. Water shall be paid for by the Owner. C. Mowing: Once grass is established the planted area shall be mowed at least twice a week during the growing season. Grass shall be mowed to a height of one-half (%Z') inch using a "reel -type" mower. Contractor shall include at least four (4) mowings in his bid. D. Weed Control: No sooner than 45 days after grass has germinated any weed growth shall ;. . be arrested by applying MSMA broadcasted over the entire planted area. Additional applications of MSMA will be required to eliminate weed growth that continues to grow after the initial application. MSMA will only be used during the growing season. All weed growth �* during the dormant season will be controlled with spot applications of "Round Up." "Round Up" will not be used until the grass is totally dormant. OWN E. Replanting: All areas that do not produce a UNIFORM STAND OF GRASS must be replanted until a UNIFORM STAND OF GRASS is established. F. Edging: All turfareas adjacentto paved areas shall be edged to maintain a neat appearance. 3.10 GRADING A. All grading and placing of topsoil on any given area will be done prior to the turfgrass installation. It will be this Contractor's responsibility to maintain the existing grades and leave them in a true and even condition after planting turfgrass. 3.11 EROSION CONTROL A. Throughout the project and the maintenance period for turfgrass, it is'the Contractor's responsibility to maintain the topsoil in place at specified grades. Topsoil and turfgrass losses due to erosion will be replaced by the Contractor until establishment and acceptance is achieved. TURFGRASS PLANTING AND MOWING 4219 02930 - 5 ki Flo 3.12 CLEAN UP A. This Contractor shall remove any excess material or debris brought onto the site or unearthed as a result of his turfgrass operations. 3.13 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall guarantee all materials used for this work to be the type, quality, and quantity specified. 4219 END OF SECTION TURFGRASS PLANTING AND MOWING 02930 - 6 SECTION 02970 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide a complete and fully operational irrigation system with all related components as called for or required on the plans and within these technical specifications for a complete and fully operational irrigation system. The Contractor shall pay for all costs for permits/inspection fees, labor, material, etc. as required to provide all water and electrical services for this system. 1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The following ASTM designations apply: D1785-Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe; Sch. 40 & 80. D2241-Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR). D2464-Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) threaded plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 40. D2466-Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) socket type plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 40. D2564-Solvent cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) plastic pipe and fittings. F656-Poly Vinyl chloride (PVC) solvent weld primer. D2855-Making solvent cemented joints with Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings. 1.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The Contractor shall report to the Architect/Engineer any deviations between the irrigation plan, technical specifications and the site. Failure to do so prior to installation of equipment which subsequently requires replacement, relocation or modification shall be done solely at the Contractor's expense. B. All local, municipal, and state laws, ordinances, codes and regulations relating to, or governing of, any portion of thiswork are hereby incorporated into and made a partof these specifications and shall be fully carried out by the Contractor. The Irrigation project foreman must have a valid license as issued by the Texas Board of Irrigators and be on -site at all times work is being executed. C. Permits needed for construction of the work included in this contract which are required by any legally constituted authority having jurisdiction, shall be obtained. Contractor shall pay for all costs in connection with permits and inspections required by such authorities. The Architect/Engineer shall be notified when these inspections are required. Any additional work to be done as a result of these inspections shall be performed at the Contractors expense. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 1 ffipq+ 1.4 WARRANTY A. See Division I, General Requirements section for this information and requirements. B. Adjusting irrigation heads to finish grade, filling trenches that have settled more than a .5", packing soil firmly around heads and valve boxes is considered part of the scope of the warranty and such work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner during the project warranty period. C. The Contractor shall extend to the Owner all warranties provided by the manufacturer of equipment installed. D. Required warranty does not include alterations necessitated by additional landscaping, tree planting, grading, or changes to pavements or structures after Final Acceptance of the project by the Owner. E. The warranty submitted under this section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and is in addition to and is in force concurrently with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.5 SUBMITTALS and ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT A. General Requirements 1. Irrigation equipment shall perform as specified and shown on the drawings. The irrigation system has been designed according to the operating characteristics of the specified equipment. Any request for product substitutions must be submitted to the Architect/Engineer at least seven days prior to bidding. B. Alternate Equipment 1. If the irrigation contractor wants to substitute any equipment or materials for those specified or called for on the drawings, he may do so by providing the following information to the Architect/Engineer for approval no later than seven days prior to the bid date: a. Provide a written statement indicating the reason for requesting the substitution. Use a separate sheet of paperfor each item to be considered. b. Provide descriptive catalog literature, performance charts and/or flow charts for each item to be considered. C. Provide the amount of cost savings per unit and for the total project should the item be approved. 2. The Owner and/or his representative shall have the sole responsibility in accepting or rejecting any substituted item as an approved equal for the originally specified equipment and materials listed on the irrigation drawings and noted in these technical specifications. 3. Equipment or materials installed without prior approval of the Owner's representative may be rejected and the Contractor required to remove and replace such materials at his own expense. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 2 PRO C. Static and Dynamic Water Pressure Test 1. These tests are required. The water source for this project is a potable water source and is to have a static delivery pressure of 30 psi. If the readings the contractor obtains are different from the above, contact the system designer immediately before proceeding. D. Testing Schedule 1. Refer to Paragraph 3.17 herein. E. Equipment Information/Warranties 1. Provide three (3) complete sets, in binders, of product warranties, operation/maintenance manuals, and equipment catalog cuts forall items installed on the project. Also include on a separate sheet of paper within the binder the date of Final Acceptance, installing company's name, address and phone/fax number, superintendent's name, and the names and addresses of the major material suppliers used by the contractor for future reference. F. Extra Equipment 1. The following extra equipment shall be provided the Owner before Final Acceptance: Rotor heads, 12 units of each model. Turf spray heads, 10 units of each model with nozzles and screens. Electric solenoids and pressure reducing units, 6 units. Pressure gauge with hose and dill air -chuck, 2 units. Plastic valve box operating handles, 4 for each style installed. QCV keys with swivel hose outlets. 4 units. Cast iron gate valve operating handle w/3' minimum handle, 1 unit. Controller cabinet keys, 4 for each controller. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Engage an experienced irrigation installerwith a minimum of years . experience who has successfully completed irrigation installations similar in material, design and scope to that of this project that resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service warranty performance. 1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall provide a record drawing on mylar bases or AutoCad drawing file obtained from the Architect/Engineer. Include dimensional locations of major components from permanent fixed points such as buildings, walls, light poles, fences, etc. Dimensions need have a minimum of 45 degrees between measurement lines to each major item of the system. Show the following minimum information on the plan: 1. Point of connection. 2. Irrigation pressure line routing. 3. Isolation gate valves (both cast-iron and brass) and quick coupling valves. 4. Electric solenoid valves. 5. 24 volt signal wire routing. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 3 6. Other related items as may be directed by the Owner's representative. B. Record all changes which are made to the c ntract drawings including changes to the pressure main and lateral piping daily. These Nns must be keep on -site at all times and available for review by the Owner's representative. C. When record drawings have been approved by the Owner's representative, transfer all information to a set of reproducible mylars or develop an AutoCad drawing file with such information. Provide this set of plans to the Owner for their permanent records. D. Contractor to prepare from the above noted record drawings a set of "Controller Charts" for each controller. These plans are to identify via color coding the geographic area that each station on a controller operates. The scale of these plans can be smaller than the record drawings but should be clearly readable. Seal these plans between two layers of 20 mil plastic. These plans must be prepared and approved in order for the system to receive final acceptance. 1.8 DEVIATION FROM PLANS A. The Contractor shall uphold the hydraulics of the system by following the plans and specifications carefully. Any deviations from the original layout shall be approved in writing - - by the Architect/Engineer. Piping must closely follow the layout as presented on the plans except when it is purposely shown in a hardscape area for graphic clarity. 1.9 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall pay for and provide all electrical and water service connections as required fora complete and operational system. Separate sleeves for water pipes and valve wires need to be installed in the areas noted on the plan with an adequate number and size of sleeves at each location to accommodate the proposed system. B. Temporary electrical service (120 volt, 20 amp circuit) will be required for each controller and the pump station (460 volt, 3 phase service). C. The Contractor shall coordinate his needs and schedule of installation with electrical, mechanical, plumbing and all other trades on the site. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL A. IRRIGATION MAINS are the portions of piping that are under constant pressure. B. LATERAL PIPING is that portion of the piping network from the solenoid valve to the sprinkler heads. C. QUICK COUPLING VALVE piping is considered a portion of the irrigation main. 2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE 4219 A. Polyvinyl chloride pipe (hereinafter referred to as PVC pipe) shall be manufactured in accordance with the following Product Standards: IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02970 - 4 A 1. Product Standard PS-22-70 shall apply to mainline piping and lateral piping and all pipe shall be Class 200 rated. Main line pipe three (3") and larger must have rubber gasket style joints. Smaller diameter mainline pipe and all sizes of lateral pipe must have only solvent welded joints. 2. Marking and Identification: All PVC pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the following information - manufacturer's name, pipe size, type of pipe and material, schedule, Commercial Standard number and NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal. 2.3 PVC PIPE FITTINGS A. All lateral PVC pipe shall have solvent welded fittings and be of the same material as the PVC pipe provided and shall be Class 200 rated. B. All main line rubber gasket pipe shall have ductile iron change -of -direction fittings as manufactured by Harco Industries. Service taps to solenoid valves from this style pipe shall be Harco Industries stainless steel strap style saddles with the appropriately sized threaded service outlet. 2.4 WIRE A. All signal wiring from a controller to a solenoid valve shall be single strand solid copper#14 g. UL-UF wire with a minimum 4/64" insulation as approved for direct underground burial in 30 volt AC or less service by the National Electrical Code. The common wire from each controller shall be as noted with white vinyl insulation material 4/64" thick. Signal wires shall have a unique solid color insulation and be different for each controller. B. All 120 volt wires and 480 volt cable required for this project shall be material as required by per City code and installed to City codes. Cables and wires carrying these voltages must be installed according to code with appropriate warning tape installed 6" below the finish grade. 2.5 WATER METER and DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY A. Installation of a separate irrigation -only water meter and double check valve assembly feeding the booster station is a part of the Contractor's responsibility. 2.6 CONTROLLERS A. Phase I controllers shall be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor. 2.7 CONCRETE FOR THRUST BLOCKS A. Shall be "Sakrete" or "Nandi -Mix" concrete or equal. MATERIAL LIST ITEM MANUFACTURER MODEL Turf rotor, large radius Toro 640 Series IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 5 4" pop-up, check valve spray Toro head w/matched precipitation nozzle, 30 psi operating r7 pressure. Solenoid valve w/PRK-24 Weathermatic n Non -potable Quick coupling Rainbird valve Valve box w/lock lid. DFW/HPI Rain sensor. Glen -Hilton Temperature sensor. Penn Field controller By Owner PVC solvent & purple tinted IPS primer. Surge protection at controllers. Intermatic Teflon paste. IPS #14 & 12 gauge UL-UF 24 volt Regency wire. k Wire splice tubes & gel. Scotch, 3-M Rubber gasket pipe fittings and Harco Industries t service outlets, ductile iron, & stainless steel. 570 PRX Series 8200 CR with Pressure Regulator 33DNP D-1200 #502 A-19 By Owner #705 solvent & P-68/PVC primer, P- 795 solvent only for flex PVC tubing. AG2401 Seal -on 500 DBY/DBR Cast iron and brass non -rising Clow, Nibco, Matco stem gate valves. Class 200 PVC rubber gasket JM, Inc., North American Pipe and solvent weldable pipe. O-ring swing joints. Lasco, Dura w: Irrigation pumping station, SFD Greenscape Pump Services As detailed on plans All other materials as called for on drawings required for the proper completion of work, shall be subject to approval by the Architect. r ..w IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Final location of the controllers shall be determined by the Architect/Engineer, with the Contractor present. !^" B. Before trenching of the system is started, flag where each sprinkler head, quick coupler valve, main line pipe, etc. is to be located in accordance with the plans. The flagging will be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer and modified due to any site conflicts. This layout will then be approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer before trenching of the system is started. Should a discrepancy in the plans become apparent at this time, in regard to size and/or shape of areas to be irrigated, such discrepancy shall be pointed out to the Arch itect/Engineer. Work must not proceed until the Architect/Engineer approves any engineering changes made necessary by such discrepancy. 1. Should such changes create an increase or decrease in the Contract Amount, the Owner shall approve such change in cost prior to commencement of work. C. Traffic control barricades shall be provided in accordance with Texas Highway Department barricade standards, for the protection of workers, pedestrians, bicycles and vehicles. D. All material shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation specifications and/or as shown on the drawings. 3.2 ELECTRICAL WORK A. All electrical work shall be performed in strict accordance with local codes and regulations, and as indicated on the drawings. Copies of all permits and inspection tags shall be given to the Owner prior to the Substantial Completion inspection. B. All labor and material required to connect the controllers and pump station to electrical service shall be provided and the installation shall use all equipment as required by the local building codes. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Inspectall pipe priorto installation. Pay particular attention to mechanical damage resulting from shipment, storage, and defects which might occur during extrusion. Such defective pipe shall be removed from the site at the end of each work day. The Architect/Engineer shall have the option to accept or reject pipe that does not appear to be of uniform quality. All main line pipe with solenoid valves in -place shall be pressure tested at a minimum of 100 psi as measured at the pump station for a two hour period. Should the system not hold pressure, the leaks will be identified, repaired, and the system retested until it passes the above test. B. Pipe Installation 1. Mainline Piping: Main line pipe three inches (3") and larger must have rubber gasket style joints while all smaller diameter main line pipe must have solvent welded style joints. Pipe shall be installed in a trench with a minimum 36" cover as noted in the details. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 7 I A 2. Lateral Piping: Install in a trench deep enough to allow for installation of sprinkler heads and valves, but in no case with less than eighteen (18) inches of cover. The width of the trench must allow the pipe to be laid next to one another not piled on top of each other in the trench. 3. Piping Layout: Piping layout is shown on the plans the way it should trenched and installed. Major deviations from this layout must be approved by the Arch itect/Engineer. Route piping around all plant material in such a manner as to avoid damage the root systems of these plants. Do not dig within the ball of any newly planted tree or shrub. C. Excavation and Backfill 1. All excavation and backfill shall be unclassified and soil used for backfill must not have rocks or debris larger than .5" diameter and all edges must be smooth. Compact all trenches and backfill around heads and valve boxes to 95% density. 2. Contact utility companies for exact location of underground utilities. The drawings do not show all locations of utilities and structures. Neither the Owner nor Architect/Engineer shall be responsible for their location. 3. Backfill all pressurized mains and marker boxes with a minimum of four (4") inches of sand backfill on all sides to protect lines and boxes from expansion and contraction. D. PVC pipe and fitting assembly. 1. Solvent welded PVC: Plastic pipe shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer to provide for expansion and contraction. a. PVC pipe shall be cut with the assistance of a squared -in sawing vise, or �-* in a manner to insure a square cut. Burrs at cut ends shall be removed prior to assembly and all pipe ends must be tapered so that a strong weld between the mating pipes will take place at the end of the pipe. b. Thoroughly clean the exterior of the mating pipe and interior of the fitting with a clean, dry cloth. All solvent weld joints must receive purple -tinted acetone cleaner/primer prior to solvent application. Apply this material sparingly to the inside of the pipe so that it does not run down inside the pipe. C. Apply a uniform coat of solvent to the outside of the pipe with a non - synthetic bristle brush. d. Apply solvent sparingly to the inside of the fitting in a similar manner using care not to allow the solvent to run down fitting into the pipe. e. Re -apply a light coat of solvent to the exterior of the pipe and quickly insert the pipe into the fitting. f. Give the pipe or fitting a quarter turn to insure even distribution of the solvent and make sure the pipe is inserted to the full depth of the fitting socket. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 8 ! g. Hold in position for 15 seconds. h. Wipe off excess solvent that appears at the outer shoulder of the fitting. The joints shall be allowed to set at least 24 hours before water pressure is applied to the system. i. All pipe shall be thoroughly flushed before any heads are installed. 2. Metal to PVC joint: Install the metal connection first on PVC to metal joints. A non - hardening Teflon paste shall be used on all threaded PVC to metal joints. Apply only light wrench pressure to tighten. 3. Where threaded PVC connections are required, use threaded PVC adapters into which the pipe may be welded. Teflon paste shall be used on all threads. No Teflon tape will be allowed. 3.4 CAST IRON GATE VALVES A. These units shall be installed as per detail with threaded adjustable heightvalve boxes over each valve with the center of the square -nutted valve stem in the middle of the vertical riser. 3.5 ELECTRIC SOLENOID VALVES A. Solenoid valves shall be as specified and sized according to the drawings. 1. Valves shall be installed in a level position with at least six (6) inches of cover over the valve. 2. Install as shown on drawings and per manufacturer's specifications. 3. Install a valve box over each valve with the flow control handle positioned in the box to enable easy access for adjustment. Boxes are to rest on non -wooden supports (bricks) and they must not rest on inlet/outlet pipes or wires. Block the "cut-out" on the valve box with non -deteriorating material so that soil will not settle into the valve box. Group multiple boxes together in a straight row evenly spaced 18" apart and uniformly 3 feet away from any hardscape. 3.6 QUICK COUPLING VALVES A. Install the PVC isolation ball valve/quick coupling valve assembly in the center each valve box so that both units are fully accessible and operational. The quick coupling valve needs M to be both horizontally and vertically supported as shown in the details. The top of the valve must be 2" below the bottom of the valve box lid. 3.7 POP-UP SPRAY HEADS A. Top of unit shall be flush with the finish grade, not below. B. A section of semi -flexible tubing of a length not less than four (4) inches, nor more than ten (10) inches shall be used to install the head onto the lateral piping. Use "Cobra" brand connectors or an approved alternate, install high flow limiter devices under the body of each head that is adjacent to hardscape. Offset the body of each spray head 4" off adjacent °^ hardscape. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 9 0 ®'"1 3.08 TURF ROTORS A. Provide turf rotors as specified in Paragraph 2.7. Install all rotors on a unitized o-ring swing - joint as shown on the detail drawings. Small radius rotors may use a premanufactured swing joint. Units must be installed flush with and perpendicular to the finish grade. Stabilizing flanges are to be used if available on all heads located on playing fields. B. Place sod for one foot minimum around each head. This sod must be "graded" into and be flush with the finish grade of the adjacent soil. 3.09 NOZZLE and ARC ADJUSTMENT A. All nozzling shall be checked for proper discharge and arc of operation. Adjust arc and/or change nozzle if necessary to fit site conditions at no extra cost to the Owner. Prevailing wind conditions and area to be covered will determine correct arc of spray. All spray nozzles and rotors must have filter screens installed and be free of debris. 3.10 VALVE WIRING A. All wiring shall be loosely bundled with locking plastic strips every 100 feet. Wiring shall be inspected before and during installation to avoid nicks and broken wires. Install this wire only on the SOUTH and WEST side of a trench. B. Install one extra signal and common wire running to the last solenoid valve in all directions from each controller. This wire must be run into and out of all solenoid valves. These wires serve as spare conductors to be used in an emergency situation or for connection to future valves. C. An expansion coil shall be proved within three (3) feet of each wire connection. Expansion coils shall be of sufficient length at each splice connection so that in case of repair, the splice may be brought above grade without disconnecting the wires. Control wires shall be P" laid loosely in the trench without stress or stretching at any point. D. Field splices between the controller and the solenoid valves will not be allowed unless at another solenoid valve box without the approval of the Owner's representative. 3.11 CLEAN-UP and REPAIR A. Upon completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment, clean and remove from the project site all surplus and discarded materials, temporary structures and debris of every kind. Leave the project site in a neat and orderly condition. Surplus and waste materials shall be legally disposed. B. Repair any damage to utilities, structures, or other improvements as a result of work related to irrigation system installation, to its original condition at no cost to the Owner. ..� IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 10 W i 3.12 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS A. Install where the rubber-gasketed main changes direction as at ells and tees and where the rubber-gasketed main terminates. B. Pressure tests shall not be made for a period of forty-eight (48) hours following the completion of pouring of the blocks. C. Block for these mains shall be sized and placed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's specifications and shall be of adequate size and so placed as to take all thrust created by the maximum internal water pressure. 3.13 FINAL COMPLETION INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing when the irrigation system has been completed, adjusted and is totally operational and ready for inspection. All items and components of the system shall be complete. B. Perform the following prior to inspection: 1. Complete all cleanup. 2. Submit all required materials, manuals and information as specified elsewhere. 3. Complete the training program for designated controller operators. 4. Record drawings shall be complete. C. The Architect/Engineer will prepare a "Punch List' of items that require completion or correction prior to approval of the system and issuance of the final payment. 3.14 TESTING SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect/Engineer in advance of the following observation meetings, according to the time indicated: 1. Head, valve etc. flagging - 5 days. 2. Flushing and hydrostatic testing of the main line piping system - 5 days. 3. Controller installation - 5 days. 4. Punch List Walk through -14 days. 5. Final Acceptance Walk through - 14 days. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT 4.1 A. The Landscape Irrigation System forthis site includes the required installation of a pumping system, control system, record drawings, controller charts and other irrigation equipment that must include all materials, installation labor, overhead/profit and the cost of the required warranty. This system shall be bid as a lump sum price as a part of the base bid. END OF SECTION ." IRRIGATION SYSTEM 4219 02970 - 11 P" SECTION 03300 CONCRETE WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS September 4, 2001 A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. , _ 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings. B. Metal Stair Nosings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02223 — Excavation, Grading, and Subgrade Preparation. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provision of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" 2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete" 3. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection" 4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" 5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Reinforced Concrete" 6. MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice" B. Workmanship: The contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the architect. C. Design and Testing 1. The contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. D. Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at contractor's expense, a testing laboratory acceptable to architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1. Job site cylinders shall be taken as directed by the architect. The contractor shall notify the testing laboratory. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders and be responsible for their care and handling, including breaking same at laboratory. 2. Test results shall be furnished to the architect, engineer, and the contractor. 0100 nn pS�eJInc.nzdnl�h oroh6 CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 1 September 4, 2001 3. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the architect, at any time during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all items. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the owner's expense, including the retesting of the rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the contractor's expense. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, patterns, stair nosings and others as requested by the architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structure" showing bar schedules,. stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or good as new. B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are shown on the drawings. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 x 6 - W2.1 x W2.1, welded steel fabric unless other wise noted. C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 60 or ASTM A 499. ®� .°n zenaplicat on prohhbiieq: 1 CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 2 August 28, 2001 I 2.3 D. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick, and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slab -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base material will not support chair legs. 3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are hot -dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless steel protected. CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150, type I, unless otherwise acceptable to architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to architect. B. Fine Aggregate: 1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars of bundles or bars. b. The limitations may be waived if, in the judgement of the architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb of voids. D. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1 %A chloride ions. G. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows: 1 Type B, Retarding 2. Type C, Accelerating 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating H. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Architect. I. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. ®200] Chap�rrtan Harvey Ar h�tycts Inc. Unauthonze Uuplrcation pro�ri6ited.' CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 3 August 28, 2001 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per square yard, complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. D. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. 1. Guardian Chemical Company, clear bond at the rate of 400 square feet to the gallon. E. Hardening, Sealing, and Dustproofmg: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. All exposed slabs not covered with tile on other applied surface finish shall receive second application where construction work is complete. 1. A second application of Guardian Chemical Company, Clear Bond at the rate of 600 square feet to the gallons over the curing compound cost. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use and independent testing facility acceptable to the architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. C. Submit written reports to the architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air entrained). E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant, at no additional cost to the owner and as accepted by the architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the architect before using in the work. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. Un2 10ho iz % pli Y prohhbt iettl' I^` CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 4 August 28, 2001 r B. Use color admixture in concrete where noted and at pattern concrete locations. Submit color selection chart for approval. Color admixture is to be added at the mixing plant, not at the site. C. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. D. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air - entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 1. 5.5 % with 1 1/2 " maximum aggregate 2. 6.0 % with 1" maximum aggregate 3. 6.0 % with 3/4" maximum aggregate 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate E. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. F. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.7 SLUMP LIMITS A. Proportion and designmixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3". 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete. 4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4". 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2.9 PATTERN CONCRETE A. Submit slate design patterns for use in the four concrete paving sections and along glass under the entrance canopy where shown on plans. Submit tactile flat domes pattern at ramps. B. Pattern concrete shall meet the same specifications as required for other concrete paving in this r"M project. ` 0711 ChiedOupcaop�h6tee`.nloCONCRETE WORK 03300 - 5 August 29, 2001 C. All pattern concrete is to have pigmented concrete, color to be selected by architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position, B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete surface and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surface. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling, and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is in accessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. ri G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designated to prevent form defection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. H. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1-1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. J. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. u° wth w.,S aup!%ayon pfoih�`1 e�'"` CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 6 i August 28, 2001 A C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, .� runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. F. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in p„ either direction. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints 1. Locate and install construction joints, where are not shown on the drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the architect. 2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Use screed type joints equal to those manufacturer by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. Screed key joints are of 24 gauge galvanized steel with 1 1/8" dowel !� knockouts at 6" on centers. Install with a minimum of five special 16 gauge by 1" stakes per ten feet of length of material. C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground; Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for P other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkhead and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finishes slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. rw+ U au�th nZe�"�upliculon pr.tg,i`eC' CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 7 August 28, 2001 3.5 3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surface of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this types of concrete. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instruction and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 3. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 4. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect, and complete the formwork 1 installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand - spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced location not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete Slabs 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not &200, o Zia 2upl cai,on pro�h6 tee° Inc. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 8 MR August 28, 2001 A sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold Weather Placing 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which would be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or material containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete on compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot so that the steel and temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and parched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise shown. P 3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete ,. floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile or other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as shown on the drawings. ®a�°v o lied tlupl caz,on plokh6`s �" CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 9 August 28, 2001. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/2" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on the drawings or in schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driver floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel finish: 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Non -Slip Broom Finish: 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platform, steps and ramps, walks and elsewhere as shown on the drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the architect before application. E. Pattern Finish: 1. Apply pattern finish to exterior concrete ramps as shown on the drawings. 2. Use only the approved pattern finish as submitted. 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above SO degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. m a00no Z%T.nplicat on pfofhb` tcV Inc.CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 10 1 Aupst 28, 2001 B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein s�+ specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surface and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during this curing period. P C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surface which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofmg, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the architect. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surface, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless specified otherwise, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, maybe removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beams, soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength if inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. a•r ® ..u. h a`2uplic onpro�,h6��e�°Inc. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 11 August 28, 2001 . . C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to architect. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling -in: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on the drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to architect. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/3" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the areas to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. 3. For exposed to view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities; cracks; spalls; air bubbles; honeycomb; rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Where possible, repair concealed formed surfaces that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. aa�°"plcp^kef'eoiiuCONCRETE WORK 03300 - 12 August 28, 2001 C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, form smoothness and to verify .�. surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide - or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -puts, honeycomb, rock pockets and other ^ objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. �* 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after, completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds �•, may be used when acceptable to architect. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 " n, diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original P" concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. ` 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 " in diameter by dry pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement W grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1 /2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of architect. 3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. r.. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one -_. test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. ° a00ho iedGupl�cato pCo`�hb`�`:I"`' CONCRETE WORK 03300 — 13 August 28, 2001 Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class on concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the architect, if, in his judgement, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. C. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 % of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the architect , engineer and the contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing services, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained , in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determined adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required when unacceptable concrete is verified. 3.15 TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS A. All new concrete walks, sloped walks, ramps, curb cuts, curb ramps, surface textures, and dimensions shall comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards of the Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes. B. New and renovated concrete surfaces shall provide at least a 2% positive slope away from -� accessible routes. Do not allow any water to stand within accessible routes. END OF SECTION ® 200 Chapman (-iaryey Arr�tecg, Inc.CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 14 Unauthorl d duplication pro i rte . PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section includes the providing and installing of all reinforcing and grouting associated with reinforced unit masonry. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 404 Aggregate for Masonry Grout. B. ASTM C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. C. ASTM C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. D. ASTM C 615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, size, quanity lengths and placement of reinforcement bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS �* A. Refer to Section 04300 - Unity Masonry System, 1.8 Project Conditions and conform to these requirements under this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Unit Masonry section for masonry materials and accessories not included in this section. sA+ B. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars, grade 60 KSI yield billet steel deformed bars complying with ASTM A 615, except as otherwise indicated. a00ho zeTdup� can o profh6` �4• I REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 1 September 4, 2001 C. Mortar and Grout: 1. Portland Cenment ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Blended Hydraulic Cement ASTM C 595, Type IS, IP or S. 3. Masonry Cement ASTM C 91, Type S. 4. Hydrated Lime ASTM C 207, Type S. 5. Aggregates: a. Sand ASTM C 144. b. Coarse for Grout ASTM C 404, Size No. 8. 6. Water: Clear, clean and potable. 7. Mortar Color: a. All natural exposed to view mortar, as selected by the architect. b.- All other locations: Natural grey. 2.2 MIXES A. Masonry Grout Mix: Conform to ASTM C 476 and the following for coarse grout: 1. One part Portald Cement, 0 to 1/10 part hydrated lime, 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose sand, 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate. 2. Meet physical requirements for grout as specified in ASTM C 476. 3. Grout for filling of reinforced cells in concrete block walls shall have a strength of 2500 pounds per square inch in 28 days. B. Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM Spec. C144 except for soundness and lightweight particles and shall have the following screen analysis: % passing No. 4 screen 100 % passing No. 8 screen 95 to 100 % passing No. 100 screen25 maximum % passing No. 200 screen 10 maximum C. Course aggregate shall conform to ASTM Spec. C404 and shall have the following screen analysis: % passing No. 1/2 in. 100 % passing No. 3/8 in. 86 to 100 % passing No. 4 10 to 30 % passing No. 8 0 to 10 % passing No. 16 0 to 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Reinforcing: 1. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical - bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in proximity, provide a clear distance u a00nChapman iilication p oihb tee.' REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 2 W August 28, 2001 I between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1 inch (which ever is greater); 2. Splice reinforcement bars at intervals not to exceed 5 feet. Provide lapped splices. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire -tie. 3. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior face of walls and 1/2 inch at other locations. Lap units not less than 6 inches at ends. Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity. 4. Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non -reinforced masonry where they intersect. B. Masonry: 1. Refer to Section 04300, Unit Masonry System for general installation requirements of unit masonry. 2. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 3. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8 inch joints. 4. Walls: a. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in b. each course centered on the units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at comers and intersections. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for comers, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. C. Grouting: 1. Use "Fine Grout" per ASTM C 476 for two-wythe walls with grout spaces less than 2 inches. 2. 3. 4. a. Concrete masonry units provide minimum clear dimension of 2 inches and clear area of 8 square inches in vertical cores to be grouted. Use "Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for two-wythe walls with grout spaces of 2 inches or larger. a. Concrete masonry units with clear dimension of 2 inches or greater and clear area of 8 square inches or greater in vertical cores. Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to requirements which follow. Low -Lift Grouting: a. Construct low -lift masonry by placing reinforcement, laying masonry units and pouring grout as work progresses. b. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. C. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 5 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam. Do not exceed a 12 inch pour height for two-wythe masonry walls. n0�iploPbniInc. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 3 August 28, 2001 d. Lay masonry units prior to each grout pour, but do not construct more than 12 inches above maximum grout pour height in one exterior wythe and 4 inches above in other exterior wythe. Provide metal wall ties if required to prevent blowouts. e. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1-1/2 inches below top course of pour. If poured in lifts, place from center to center of masonry courses. f. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2 inches below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. g. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. D. Formwork: 1. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork. 2. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie, and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 3. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. 4. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of the member before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. a. Seven days for arches. 5. Limit extent of masonry construction to sections which do not exceed the maximum pour requirements specified hereafter. Provide temporary dams or barriers to control ^ horizontal flow of grout at ends of wall sections. Build dams full height of grout pour. If masonry units are used, do not bond into permanent masonry wythes. Remove temporary dams after completion of grout pour. END OF SECTION ® a00n ��ea'2uplica onpfo�h6tte. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 4 September 4, 2001 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on the drawings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06125 - Wood Deck. B. Section 07610 - Sheet Metal Roofing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standard: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated. 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any connections designed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings". 2. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code". 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". B. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the contractor's responsibility. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and test in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will .iCia'Yon pm`6re: Inc. .eplctSTRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 September4, 2001 not relieve the contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2: Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Design of Members and Connections: 1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 2. Promptly notify the architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel: 1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of registered professional engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of — members, and details, schedules, procedures, and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general consideration only. —. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the contractor's responsibility. 3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate _ welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. B. Steel beams shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and shall be unloaded with a two point sling on a winch line from a crane or winch truck. Allowing steel members to fall from the bed of a truck will not be permitted. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Store in an upright position with blocking spaced not more than 15 feet on center. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36, except where other type steel is shown. B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy-46 ksi. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A 501. D. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A regular low- carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1. Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts, however use only hexagonal units for exposed connections. ®na °no tZru'2up1 ea.n proih6` te`j: IncSTRUCTURAL STEEL, 05120 2 August 28, 2001 la*A E. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows. a* 1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 325. F. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. G. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Modified Alkyd; TT-P-86d, Type I and II. 2.2 FABRICATION: A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. "Provide camber in structural members as shown. 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: 1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 3. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. 4. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purling, gins, and other framing members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erections. C. High -Strength Bolted Construction: 1. Install high -strength threaded fasteners in accordance with the AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". D. Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. E. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. F. Splicing: 1. Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the drawings. All other splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the architect and/or engineer. When approved, copies P" of weld test shall be furnished to the architect and engineer. Splicing of columns will not be permitted under any circumstances. �'" Una, h1 Ch d"�uplica on pCokh6 t��'"` STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 August 28, 2001 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. 2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high -strength bolted with friction -type connectors. 3. Apply two coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. B. Surface Preparation: 1. After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPQ as follows: a. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or b. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or C. SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". C. Painting: 1. Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and all exposed surfaces. 2.4 CORROSION PROTECTION A. After anchor bolt nuts are installed, throughly cover with roof mastic bolts, nuts, column base plate, and column one inch above the level of concrete. f PART 3 EXAMINATION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the erector. 3.2 ERECTION A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as specified. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. C. Comply with AISC Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. D. Do not enlarge holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. E. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under ®"a0uth.,= tlupli;cation pro�,hb` tel: `"` STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 PM August 28, 2001 I stress, as acceptable to the architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. F. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. G. Cover with roof mastic all metal anchor bolts, nuts, column base plates, and columns that will be in contract with concrete. 3.3 SPLICING OF MEMBERS A. Generally, splicing of beams will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the architect. B. Any splicing proposed shall be clearly noted on the shop drawings and shall be initialled by the architect prior to fabrication. END OF SECTION l r ® m zed�uplic u. prohh6tted,Ina. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5 September 4, 2001 SECTION 05313 !" METAL FLOOR DECK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This contract shall include all materials, equipment and labor required to construct a foundation system for each portable classroom unit to be furnished under this contract. �w 1.3 EXCAVATION A. Excavate square and in alignment each way to the dimensions shown on the drawings. B. Excavate to a true plane meeting the elevations shown on the drawings. ram+ t PART PRODUCT 2.1 STEEL DECK - A. Steel deck to be equal to 3C20 gauge Conform Decking. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 LEVELING A. Leave foundation level, true, and properly aligned to receive concrete slab. 3.2 ROUGH -IN A. Coordinate all rough -in conduit, pipe, duct, anchors, and/or miscellaneous building systems as may be necessary to provide a complete job. FOR B. Avoid having to return to this portion of the project to correct rough -in over sights. END OF SECTION ® 2007 Chapman $arYey A,%l. tO V, Inc. METAL FLOOR DECK Unauthonzed tluphca4on pro t rte . _ 05313 - 1 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PARTI GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal. 1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03300 - Concrete Work: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. C. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. D. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars. F. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. G. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. H. ASTM A386 - Zinc -Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. I. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. J. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. K. ASTM B177 - Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use. L. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. M. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. N. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. &20 ha a egy Ar,%h au&C r,zegn�mlr ca!�o ftc2, Inc. up pro 1 Ite . METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1 September 4, 2001 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare shop drawings under direct supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. B. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01300, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. The contractor shall verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. It shall be the responsibility of the fabricator to accurately construct items to meet required dimensions. s� PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. B. Plates: ASTM A283. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325. D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. E. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. 2.2 FABRICATION sA A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. - D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. p" a�a o ied uplieatio" p �h6t te'�:'"° METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 .e, r - September 4, 2001 .. E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted *! otherwise. 2.3 FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items with two coats. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. FIR 3.2 PREPARATION n A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections. .� 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain architect's approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. r,- F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise noted. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise noted. END OF SECTION '' ®na°u°Nlwiaetl tluplicazton ptu�h6`'i°e`d`° Inc. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 September 4, 2001 SECTION 06125 WOOD DECK ?ART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof curbs and cants; blocking in wall and roof openings; wood furring and grounds; concealed wood blocking. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. B. Section 07610 - Sheet Metal Roofmg. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. B. Meet or exceed ASTM E 84 criteria. C. Meet or exceed UL 723:PR-S criteria. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA, WWPA. B. Fire resistant treated 2 x 6: NFPA. 2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded. B. Particleboard Roof Sheathing: ANSI A208.1 wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; sanded faces. C. Plywood Floor Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing Span Rating; sanded. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Plywood Underlayment: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded. ® 2001 Chap�rtan Harvey ArCh6tect�. Inc. WOOD DECK. 06125 — 1 Urmuthon=5 ouplrcanon profit ite . September 4, 2001 B. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1; wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; sanded faces. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations, plain finish -- elsewhere. B. Die Stamped Connectors: Galvanized steel. — C. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel. — 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Exterior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of 25 or less. _ B. D-Blaze, Bowie -Sims -Prange Treating Corporation. C. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water -born preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. PART 3 EXECUTION — 3.1 FRAMING A. Erect wood framing members in accordance with applicable code. Place members level and plumb. Place horizontal members crown side up. B. Curb all roof openings except where curbs are provided. Construct curb members of single — pieces per side. 3.2 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT — A. Site apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Treat site -sawn cuts. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on untreated wood in contact with cementitious materials roofing and related metal flashings. C. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. — 3.3 CONCEALED GROUNDS A. Provide fire resistant concealed grounds in framing as required for secure anchoring of wall mounted building components. END OF SECTION e aooho Zea�uplicarvo P 0%b,0e`a, `°e. WOOD DECK 06125 - 2 A September 4, 2001 SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Special fabricated cabinet units. B. New countertops on new cabinet units. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS a - A. Section 09900 - Painting: Finishing cabinet exterior and interior. 1.4 REFERENCES A. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood. B. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. C. NWMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. s� D. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. "^ E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. F. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. G. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work to custom quality in accordance with Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). F 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint details, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit fire treated lumber certificate under provisions of Section 01300. e*+ ®^a.ttho iied�upljeahon pw i6` t ° IncARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 1 September 4, 2001 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of percent; species and grade as follows: ITEM SPECIES CUT Cabinet Frame White Pine Plain Sliced Exposed Frame Birch Plain Sliced B. Hardwood Lumber FS MM-L-736; graded in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: ITEM SPECIES CUT Exposed Frame Birch Plain Sliced C. Cabinet concealed wall grounds are to be fire treated lumber; submit certificate for review. Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Wood Particleboard: Per AWI standard, composed of wood chips, made with high waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces, located as follows: ITEM: Shelving; Bulkheads; Non -exposed tops, bottoms and ends. B. Hardboard: PS 58; pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, smooth two sides, located as follows: ITEM: Drawer Bottoms; Cabinet Backs; Drawer Faces and Doors; Edges of shelves, drawers faces, and door faces. C. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI; core material of particleboard; species and cut as follows: ITEM: Underlayment D. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI; core material of particleboard; type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cut as follows: ITEM FACE SPECIES CUT Door and Drawer Fronts Birch Birch Drawer Construction White Pine Plain Sliced I ® 2p-hollzed up ARCHITECTURAL P o`hh6t� e� 1nc ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 2 September 4, 2001 2.3 ACCEPTABLE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A. Wilsonart Manufacturing. B. Formica. C. Nevamar. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.4 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NWMA LD 3, GP - 50 general purpose type; color as listed in plastic laminate schedule at the end of this section. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. D. Computer Keyboard: Micro Computer Accessories, Inc. No. 620 with mouse tray No. 6295. E. Grommets and Sleeves: 2 inch round hole, similar to Valencia 44-N027384, black. 2.6 HARDWARE A. Shelf Standards and Rests: K & V No. 255AN and 256AN. B. Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley No. 4484. C. Catches: Stanley No. SP46. D. Drawer Slides: K & V No. 1429, full extension, 100 lb. rated. E. Drawer Lock and Key: Stanley, finish to match cabinet hardware. F. Hinges: Grass America No. 1203 with appropriate base plates. 2.7 FINISHES A. Submit full range of manufacturer's finishes for selection by architect. B. Provide examples to architect of all finishes under consideration. 2.8 FABRICATION A. All millwork is to be flush overlay construction per the Architectural Millwork Institute. B. Ship assembled casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. ®20°no zen"d�PlKaeio� pro�h6i[eA: Inc.ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 3 September 4, 2001 C. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges to have less than 1/16 inch gap in any joint. Exposed edges to have hardwood edges. D. Door and drawer fronts: 3/4 inch thick with hardwood edges. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. All field cuts through laminate are to have two coats of adhesive in order to minimize laminate deterioration at plumbing fixtures. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Make comers and joints hairline. Slightly bevel arrises. G. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern. H. Provide cutouts for grommets and sleeves, plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. I. All shelf standards are to be recessed flush with adjacent surface. All units with adjustable shelves, either open shelves or closed cabinets, are to have recessed metal standards. PART 3 EXECUTION — 3A INSPECTION A. Verify adequacy and location of backings and support framing members that are concealed within walls. B. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.2 HARDWARE A. Provide twenty-four (24) drawer lock and key assemblies, location of locks to be selected by owner. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments at concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Carefully scribe casework which is against other building materials, leaving gaps of 1/32 inch maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. D. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. E. Do not cut hole for equipment cord grommet through counter top until unit is completely installed and approved. Actual locations of grommets will be verified by architect prior to cutting hole. See millwork elevations for general locations. F. Provide concealed grounds in all wall framing areas to receive wall and base cabinets, refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. autl o zed�upl c ,on prohl �ti etl: I ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 4 September 4, 2001 ...., 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function r smoothly and correctly. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. t END OF SECTION .w ,f e� t, f 1 ®nauUionied"�taiplication prohib ,Inc. ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 — 5 September 4, 2001 SECTION 07105 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section includes providing and installation of waterproofing and/or dampproofing. B. The following types are included under this section: 1. Waterproofing at sills, heads and elsewhere as detailed. 2. Spray applied masonry water repellent for brick masonry. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System. B. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all types of waterproofing and dampproofing to architect for approval before any materials are ordered; installation instructions are to be included in this submittal. B. Submit photographs of actual application of dampproofing and waterproofing material on this job; include applicable evidence that products were applied as directed. 1.5 SAMPLE DAMPPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply per manufacturer's instructions, to not less than 200 sq. ft. (per coat) of substrate material matching job conditions. B. Determine coverage rate for application. C. After treatment fully cures, water test to verify that repellent will repel moisture from surface. D. Verily that no surface stains or discoloration will result from application. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver to site in original sealed containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, and type of material. B. Comply with instruction for storage, shelf life, and handling. ® a°u n`g`2�Plica onplokh6o`e�' DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07105 - 1 September 4, 2001 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not proceed under the following conditions: 1. If substrate contains frozen water. 2. In rain. _ 3. In high or gusty winds. 4. In ambient temperatures lower than 40 degrees F. B. Do not proceed with work if application will create a hazard to workers, owner's, employees that may be on the site, or to neighboring persons and property. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Each type of waterproofing and dampproofing shall be guaranteed against leakage of water, excessive deterioration, or otherwise failing to perform as required within the guarantee period, due to failure of materials or workmanship. The period of guarantee is for term of 5 years after acceptance of building by owner and architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Waterproofing: 1. W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2. Celotex. 3. Rubber and Plastic Compound Company. B. Dampproofing: 1. W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2. Chemprobe Corporation. 3. Thoro Systems Incorporated. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Waterproofing shall be Nervastral Seal-Pruf HD, or equal, as manufactured by Rubber and Plastics Compound Company, Long Island, N.Y.; Gauge shall be 0.30, 3.3 oz/SF. B. Masonry water repellent shall be equal to PRIME-A-PELL 200, manufactured by Chemprobe Corporation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Proceed with waterproofing and dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetration work has been completed. Installer shall not commence his operations until all substrate and other conditions are acceptable to him for a satisfactory installation. B. Proceed with work under this heading only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Una0tthoriieg'aupliCat,on p �^6` �a 11e. DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07105 - 2 September 4, 2001 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 PREPARATION A. Verify surfaces to receive water repellent coatings are clean, free of efflorescence, oil, grease, or other foreign matter detrimental to application. B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove grease or oil with a solvent, effective alkaline cleaner, or detergent as instructed by coating manufacturer. Scrub surfaces with water. C. Allow surfaces to dry prior to application. INSTALLATION A. All waterproofing and dampproofmg products shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. All surfaces shall be dry and compatible in every other way to provide a first-class dampproof installation. B. Waterproofing: Waterproofing at sills and similar type waterproofing requirements shall receive Nervastral, or equal, synthetic sheeting embedded in solid Nervaplas, or equal, cold applied mastic, minimum of one gallon to 40 sq. ft. of sheeting areas. Sheeting shall not be deformed to the extent to promote cracking. C. Dampproofmg: All exterior surfaces of masonry shall be given one brush or spray coat of clear water repellent waterproofing applied in accordance with manufacturer's specific written directions. Care shall be taken to not over -run other adjacent materials. Special care should be taken to protect all glazing materials and similar products. PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating. If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately by method approved by the manufacturer. CLEANING A. Remove any over spray from adjacent materials not scheduled to receive dampproofmg and waterproofing. B. Completely restore adjacent surfaces to their condition prior to over spraying. END OF SECTION u °no iedTpliea uX prohhb,:Inc. DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07105 - 3 PART 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 P" SECTION 07213 BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. RELATED WORK A. Provide rigid cavity wall type insulation at masonry construction and unfaced batt insulation at exterior stud walls where shown on the drawings. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04340 - ReinforcedUnit Masonry System. B. Section 07105 - Dampproofmg and Waterproofing. C. Section 09511 — Suspended Acoustical Ceilings QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by r-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick, measured by test method included in referenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are expressed by the temperature causing one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Contractor shall be an established firm regularly engaged in installation of wall insulations for the past five years. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84. B. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. C. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. D. Thermal Performance: ASTM C653. E. Acoustical Performance: ASTM C665. &2a�ut}ionz%tluplicauon prole"6` He`d`' Inc. BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION 07213 - 1 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. B. Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance values, including R-values (aged values for plastic insulations), densities, compression strengths, fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings, and similar properties. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation. All materials damaged from above instances will not be used and will be disposed of properly from the site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Batt Insulation: 1. Owens/Corning Corporation. 2. CertainTeed B. Substitutions: 1. In accordance with Section 01600 2.2 MATERIALS A. Insulation above ceiling, installed on top of ceiling, shall be 3 inch FSK faced batts with a minimum R-value of 11.0 at 75 degrees F mean temperature as indicated on the drawings. Flame spread of 0-25, smoke developed of 50. B. Insulation in exterior stud walls to be Owens/Corning 3 inches FSK faced batts with a minimum R-value of 11.0 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature as indicated on the drawings. Flame spread of 0-25, smoke developed of 50. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect cavity wall surfaces for mortar spillings and outcroppings. Surfaces will be smooth prior to insulation installation. B. Installation procedures constitutes acceptance of the substrate. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until substrate is satisfactory. ®nZ,L ��a�upl anon p{o�hh�,te� I BAIT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION 07213 - 2 September 4, 2001 A B. CO cas aP co be C. Ex ar D. A the E. A 0 wi PM mply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each e; including method of support or anchorage to the substrate, as appropriate for each plication indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project nditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations fore proceeding with the work. tend insulation full thickness as shown over entire surface to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly ound obstructions and fill voids with spray foam. pply a single layer of insulation of the thickness indicated or the required thickness for the rmal value indicated, unless otherwise shown or required to make up the total thickness. pply insulation units of the type shown to the substrate by the method indicated. If not therwise indicated and except for units resting on horizontal surfaces, bond units to substrate th adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. END OF SECTION "100h i�"Aupli;cailo" P,h6Inc.BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION 07213 - 3 o x. September 4, 2001 SECTION 07465 PREFORMED METAL SIDING �.� PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare roof deck and substrates to receive metal surfaces. B. Provide and install metal roofing, flashing, coping and trim as shown and detailed on the - drawings. C. Provide and install metal gutter as shown and detailed on the drawings. D. Provide and install metal panels to roof, walls and soffit panels as shown and detailed on the r' drawings. E. Installation of hat channel support shims, clips, fasteners, cleats, and other required devices. F. Applying flashings and sealants as shown on drawings and recommended by manufacturer. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS s", 4.. 4 A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. * B. Section 07610 - Sheet Metal Roofing. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain related materials from a single source. B. Applicator: 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. mom 2. Work performed by firm with five years' minimum experience in successful installation of similar systems of project complexity. C. A pre -roofing conference shall be scheduled prior to beginning any work to the roof panels, roof deck, roof insulation, or support shims. Contractor shall give seven days' notice to the - - architect prior to scheduled conference. Contractor and related subcontractors shall attend conference. 1.5 SUBMITTALS f' F: Y A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300. ® aDtho %g duplication p 6 W. Inc.PREFORMED. METAL SIDING 07465 - 1 September 4, 2001 - - B. Submit shop drawings showing layout, dimensions, anchorage, supports and applicable details and accessories for the conditions indicated on the plans and drawings. C. Submit samples of all types of exposed metal finish materials, min. 24 inches long. D. Submit certification by manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store felts and roof insulation on wood pallets or other similar raised surface. B. Do not allow materials to become wet or soiled. Remove wet, unsuitable, or damaged materials from project site. C. Store rolls on end. Deformed rolls or rolls with edge damage will be rejected. D. Do not store materials in or on building in such concentrations as to impose excessive stress on deck or structural members. E. Preformed metal shapes, components, and accessories shall be checked for moisture accumulation. If moisture is present, then items should be uncrated and wiped dry, then restacked and loosely covered so as to allow air to circulate between individual pieces and yet protect items from collecting deposits of foreign matter or incurring physical damage. All preformed metal shapes and components are to be checked again prior to installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Submit a 20 year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and contractor agreeing to replace roofing panels and accessories with fail in material and workmanship. Warranty shall include rupture, structural failure, faulty workmanship and perforation. PART2 PRODUCTS — 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND FABRICATORS A. Walls: MBCI, FW-12-2, Architectural Wall Panels, 24 gauge, Signature 300 finish. B. Roof: MBCI, LokSeam, 16 inch width, 24 gauge, Signature 300 finish. C. Substitutions 1. Items of same function and performance are acceptable in accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Prefinished metal gutters and downspouts: 1. Type: Rectangular type gutter as shown on drawings. 2. Material: 24 gauge. 3. Finish: pre -finished. 4. Conformance: ASTM A-792. B. Blocking and Shims: 1. Types: a. Standard and field cut shapes. 8 a0°too Z�a'�uP1ication proRhb` tel: IncPREFORMED METAL SIDING 07465 - 2 September 4, 2001 b. Zee or hat channel support shims. 2. Materials: a. Wolmanized lumber; see Section 06100: Roof Carpentry. b. Hat channel support shims; 1-1/4 inches, 16 gage sheet metal. C. Fasteners: 1. Types: Cups, cleats, rivets, anchors, expansion bolts as recommended by manufacturer. Roof panels must be anchored directly to support shims as shown on drawings. 2. Materials: Non -corrosive metals compatible with roof material. D. 30 pound felt moisture barrier ASTM D 2178. tom, E. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Flashing Cement: ASTM D 2822. 2. Gaskets and sealants as recommended by manufacturer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, and as required to fulfill indicated performance requirements which have been demonstrated by factory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional requirements, and with structural requirements. B. Forming: Custom-made fascia and flashing at curved walls shall be stretch wrap contoured by an acceptable fabricator to dimensions shown on the drawings, and not to exceed manufacturer's maximum allowable tolerances. Radii shall be achieved by uniformly distributed pleats as required. Cutting material to form radii is not acceptable. C. Water Penetration; No significant, uncontrolled leakage at 4 pounds per square foot pressure with spray test. "^ D. Air Infiltration: 0.02 cfm per square foot for gross roof/wall areas, with 4 pounds per square foot differential pressure. E. Condensation: Fabricate panels for control of condensation, including vapor inclusion of seals and provisions for breathing, venting, weeping, and draining. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that work which penetrates roof deck has been completed and secured. B. Verify that roof deck surfaces are flush, clean, dry, and free of depressions or imperfections that exceed the manufacturer's allowable clearances for roof system installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove debris and matter detrimental to proper roof installation. B. Protect adjacent building surfaces prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION ®2001 Chaprttan�-1aryey ArpIt'tpct� Inc. unauthoriva ouplicat�on prohi6ued: PREFORMED METAL SIDING 07465 - 3 September 4, 2001 - A. Moisture barrier: 1. Apply felts and bitumen over insulation or roof deck in strict accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 2. Shingling of the roof plies shall begin at low point of roof. B. Preformed metal panels, support shims, fascia and trim: 1. Prior to installing metal panels, install a rosin coated paper over base felt. 2. Set preformed metal shapes and trim flat and fasten to substrate as per manufacturer's recommendations. Periodic checks of panel alignment and flush placement of clips and anchors shall be required. 3. At the ridge an EPDM closure shall be placed behind a panel closure piece in a bed of sealant. 4. Metal pieces to field cut shall be cut on the ground. (Refer to metal fabrications Section 05500). Field cuts shall conform to the same standards as shop cuts. _ 5. Installer shall follow layout and dimensions carefully as indicated on the drawings. Avoid unhemmed edges, "oil canning", or telegraphing imperfections from substrate surfaces to the exposed roof panel surface. 6. Gutters and downspouts to be set plumb and level with EPDM liner continuous. 7. Carefully establish the required arc for support shims prior to installing roof panels. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Comply with panel fabricator's and material manufacturer's instructions and recommendation for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal/structural movement. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on level/plumb/slope and location/line as indicated, and within 1/8 inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work which have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of fmish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures. B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films (if any) as each panel is installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION ®"au�konzg%aPlication pio�h6`� ��'"` PREFORMED METAL SIDING 07465 - 4 September 4, 2001 SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART I GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precoated galvanized steel roofing and associated flashings. This contract shall include all roofing material necessary to make roof system complete. B. This contract shall provide a warranty as described herein, to cover the entire roofing system. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06125 - Wood Deck. t. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Division 15 - Mechanical. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, termination, and installation details. B. Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inch in size of each metal roofing profile, illustrating design, standing seam, external comer, ridge, material, color, and finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ra A. Perform work in accordance with the following: 1. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. B. Installed metal roof system shall meet Underwriters Laboratories 90 Wind Uplift rating criteria. C. Metal roof components shall carry an Underwriters Laboratories 'Fire Resistance certificate. 1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. B. Care shall be maintained throughout the work to prevent overloading of the existing structure with concentrated piles of roofing materials, distribute material over roof such that excessive loading of the structure does not occur. I P" ?.21.10 ,h.Ch t%1gtg, Inc. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610-1 1.7 1.8 11V PART 2 2.1 September 4, 2001 NOTIFICATION A. The architect shall set a date and time for a pre -roofing conference. Notify the architect at least five working days in advance of the date desired to start roofing operations in order to schedule conference. B. Roofing materials shall be reviewed by the architect at the job site during the pre -roofing conference. The roofing contractor shall have at least a portion of all materials to be used on the project available at the job site during the conference. CLEAN UP A. Roofing contractor shall exercise care to prevent scattering of debris during roofing operations. Paper wrappers, scrap felt, etc., shall be weighted to prevent blowing. B. No burning of debris will be permitted on the job site. Remove such debris from the site and haul to the public landfill area. WARRANTY A. Roofing contractor shall be approved by the accepted roofing manufacturer prior to commencement of roofing installation. — B. Contractor shall arrange for such inspections as may be required by the roofing manufacturer as the work progresses. C. Upon completion, furnish to the owner a twenty year material warranty issued by'"the accepted roofing manufacturer. The contractor shall include in his bid the cost of such warranty. D. Upon completion, furnish to the owner a ten year weather tightness warranty issued by the accepted roofing manufacturer. The contractor shall include in his bid the cost of such warranty. _ E. The roof installer shall provide a certificate stating that the roof installer is recognized by the accepted roof manufacturer to install this type of roof system. PRODUCTS SHEET MATERIALS A. Fabricators: 1. MBCI. _ 2. Equal Manufacturers B. The metal panels listed below are based on MBCI so as to establish a minimum level of quality. Alternate products of equal quality will be considered, subject to the final approval of the architect. C. Roof panels to be equal to MBCI Lokseam, 16 inch width, 24 gauge, Signature 300 finish. — D. Wall panels to be equal to MBCI Architectural Panels, FW-12-2, 24 gauge, Signature 300. ® a00„ Czed tluplicanon prohhbited' I"` SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 2 t; September 4, 2001 2.2 ACCESSORIES !-" A. Fasteners: Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal. B. Damp Proofing: No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt. C. Underlayment: Wood as shown on drawings. D. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. r: E. Protective Backing Paint: FS TT-C-494, bituminous. PM F. Sealant: Type specified in Section 07900. G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. 2.3 SHOP FABRICATION A. Form components true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. B. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet. C. Hem exposed edges on underside, miter and seam corners. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom .. edge formed outward and hemmed to form drip. D. Form material with standing seam. E. Fabricate comers in one piece, long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. A 2.4 FINISH n A. Signature 300 Standard Colors. B. Colors to be selected from standard manufacturer's color chart. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that roof openings, roof penetrations, cant strips, and reglets are in place, and that nailing strips are properly located. r* B. Verify that deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Verify that joints in wood deck are solidly supported and fastened. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details included in SMACNA manual. B. Install starter and edge strips and offset cleats per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Cleat and seam all joints using a concealed fastening system. 1! ®2001 Cj�aRman Harvey Ar0htQcu, Inc. uaautnonzeti Cuplfcauon proh�6ited. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 3 September 4, 2001 D. Use bedding compound for joints between metal and bitumen or metal and felts. E. Provide miscellaneous trim as designed in same material as roof. F. Back paint surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. 3.3 STANDING SEAM ROOFING A. Conform to current SMACNA and manufacturer's details. B. Provide cover battens of matching material where ribs turn from roof to eaves. C. Provide rake trim, ridge cover, and miscellaneous exposed flashing of matching material. D. Provide rivet heads, screw heads, and colored sealant matching roof material color. 3.4 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all debris from construction site. B. Remove stains and dirt from panels. Damaged panels are to be removed and replaced with new matching panels. END OF SECTION �°nz�cp�htt �et�'1o�ProitSHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 4 September 4, 2001 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide caulking in conjunction with interior painting operations and as otherwise indicated on drawings for interior caulking. B. Provide sealant where indicated on the drawings in conjunction with weather seals, and as otherwise noted. C. Perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint packing or filler, priming, e*�+ caulking and sealing indicated by the drawings and specified herein. Furnish all supplementary items necessary. D. In fire rated partitions, install only fire resistant sealants. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System. B. Section 08115 - Steel Doors and Frames. C. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Minimum two year's experience in applying sealants and approved by manufacturer. a .. B. Manufacturer's Representative: 1. Arrange for technical representative to be on project site to advise installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of materials and to check installation. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS TT-S-00230C, Type II Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component. B. FS TT-S-001543A Sealing compound: Silicone Rubber Base. W C. FS TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A Joint Sealant: Self Levelling. D. ASTM C834 Standard Specification for latex sealing compounds. ram! ® auth Chapman i aryey pro i �ct�s, Inc, JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 C 20010 hap an Hahon pro t tt September 4, 2001 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for sealant, backing, and related materials. 2. Samples: a. Color charts for selection by architect. b. Furnish samples of custom colors. 3. Certification: a. Letter of certification from manufacturer or certified test laboratory report that materials are chemically compatible with each other and with substrate. b. Letter from manufacture that certifies material's fire resistant qualities. C. When requested by the architect, submit samples of cured sealants and a 6 inch long sample of each type of joint backup. 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by the manufacturer. Store in a manner to protect materials from the weather. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warrant, in writing, materials and workmanship against air and water leakage for a five-year period. B. Provide written warranty of materials fire resistance and accepted use in at least a one hour fire resistant assembly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Pecora Chemical corporation. B. Sonneborn Building Products. C. W.R. Grace and Company. D. General Electric Company. E. Products Research and Chemical Corporation. F. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Polysulfide (Type I): 1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self -leveling) or Type 2 (nonsag) as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Color: As selected by architect. 0200u�upl Ili on prokh6trt `�' I JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2 August 28, 2001 3. Acceptable products: a. Synthacalk GC-5, Pecora Corp. b. 350, PRC. C. Sonolastic, Sonneborn-Contech, Inc. B. Chlorosulfonated Polyurethane (Type 2) 1. One part conforming to FS TT-S-230C. 2. As selected by architect. 3. Acceptable products: a. Synthacalk, Pecora. C. Polyurethane (Type 3): 1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-0000227E, Class A, Type I or II. - 2. Color: As selected by architect. 3. Acceptable products: a. NR-200, Pecora. b. No. 200, PRC. C. Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant, Sonneborn-Contech. d. THC-900/901, Tremco. D. Polyurethane (Type 4): 1. One -part conforming to FS TT-S-000230C, Class A, Type II. 2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect. 3. Acceptable products: a. No. 6000, PRC. b. NP 1, Sonneborn - Contech. C. Dymonic, Tremco. E. Silicone (Type 5): 1. One part rubber based silicone conforming to FS TT-S-001543, Class A, Type I. 2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect. 3. Acceptable products: a. 790 Building Sealant, Dow Corning. b. Silproof, General Electric. C. Proglaze, Tremco. F. Acrylic, Solvent Cure (Type 6): 1. One -part, FS TT-S-00230. 2. Acceptable products: a. Unicrylic, Pecora. b. Permacryl, Schnee -Moorhead Chemicals, Inc. C. Mono, Tremco Manufacturing Company. G. Nondrying, Nonskinning (Type 7): 1. One -part sealing compound. 2. Acceptable products: a. GC-55, Noncuing, Goal Chemical. b. BR-96, Pecora. C. Curtain Wall Sealant, Tremco. H. Bitumen Impregnated Sealant (Type 8): 1. Precompressed bitumen impregnated foam joint sealant. 2. Size: As recommended by manufacturer for joint condition as rain seal. 3. Acceptable product: Emseal compressed, Emseal Corporation. ®2Hey Inc.U0A%nHoaoA7gct JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 I. Backer Rod: Closed cell expanded polyurethane or polyethylene "Denver" foam com atible P with sealant; sized and shaped to control depth of sealant; and to maintain 20 % to 50 % compression of material. J. Joint Cleaners and Primers: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. K. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape. L. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape. M. Sealant Tape: 1. Compressible adhesive -cohesive tape of cross -linked butyl polyisobutylene rubber that accommodates variations and movement, sized as necessary to allow for joint movement of + or - 25 %. 2. Acceptable product: PTI 606, Protective Treatments, Inc. N. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Closed cell polyethylene compatible with sealant. 2. Acceptable product: Sonoflex F, Sonneborn. 3. Fire resistant to be used in at least a one hour fire rating classification. 2.3 MIXING A. Mix components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine all surfaces to receive sealant and report all conditions not acceptable. Installation shall be deemed as acceptance of the surface. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean all surfaces and joints thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material, and previously applied paint or primer. B. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant or caulk manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. C. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, oil, or grease by solvent cleaning and wipe surfaces. All surfaces must be clean and dry. Any protective coating on building materials that will impair sealant bond shall be removed. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Sealants: 1. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding preparation, priming, application life, and application procedure. 2. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. 3. Apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size or other appropriate means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints. 8nau�hof,zea"duplicai,on probh�iiej' Inc.JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4 tw.t s•� FOR August 29, 2001 4. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. B. Caulking: 1. Caulking: Apply caulking joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface. Apply caulking with a pressure gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and assure good adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed. C. Joint Size: 1. Sealant and Caulking: Depth equal to 1/3 times joint width or as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess caulking or sealant materials and smears from adjacent surfaces as work progresses. B. On non -porous surfaces excess uncured sealant shall be removed with a solvent moistened cloth immediately. On porous surfaces excess sealant should be allowed to cure overnight, then removed by lightly wirebrushing or sanding. All adjacent surfaces shall be clean and free from stains. C. Remove all debris resulting from these operations from the site. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Interior and Exterior Joints Subject to Movement (Not Including Traffic): Type 1, 2, 4, or 5 at Contractor's option and as recommended by manufacturer for joint condition and sealant color. B. Interior and Exterior Horizontal Joints Subject to foot and Vehicular Traffic: Type 2, self - leveling. C. Interior Horizontal and Vertical Joint Not Subject to Movement (Not Including Traffic): Type 6. D. In contact with roofmg and waterproofing materials: Type 3 or 4, low modulus, unmodified. E. Unexposed window joints: Type 7. F. Interior fire resistant rating of at least a one hour rated assembly subjected to minimal movement: Type 2. G. Secondary seal and exterior brick expansion joint secondary seals: Type 8. END OF SECTION ®n1001 Chaprttan Haryey A, Ig-t�, Inc. Uauttronzed Cuplicat�on pro ne . JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 0 SECTION 07920 CAULKING AND SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. The term "sealant" or "sealing" shall refer to exterior joints exposed to weather or interior joints exposed to moisture. When "sealant" is used in an outside joint in aluminum or steel frames, "sealant" shall be required on the inside joint also. B. The term "caulk" or "caulking" (calking) shall refer to interior joints not normally exposed to weather or moisture conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submit to Architect manufacturer's literature, specification data, and color chart for all materials proposed for this project. B. Identify their use and location. 1.03 GUARANTEE A. General Contractor, subcontractor and product manufacturer shall jointly guarantee thework against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Repair and/or replace such defective work, and other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during guarantee period without additional cost to the Owner. C. This guarantee will not apply to defects caused by failure of work of other trades, if such defects were impossible to detect at time of installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. As manufactured by Pecora or approved equal. B. Concrete -to -Concrete (Horizontal Joint): NR-201 with primer. C. Masonry -to -Masonry Vertical: Dynatrol II. D. Thresholds and Sills: BC-158 Butyl Rubber. E. Interior Caulking: AC-20 Acrylic Latex. 2.02 PRIMERS A. Type as manufactured by manufacturer of sealing or caulking material and completely compatible with compound. CAULKING AND SEALANTS 4219 07920 - 1 I W 2.03 JOINT BACKING A. Rods or tape in sizes and types as recommended by manufacturer of sealing or caulking material, and completely compatible with compound. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Work shall be performed by experienced mechanics skilled in execution of type of work required and in application of specified materials. B. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's name and brand clearly marked thereon. C. When perimeter joints around frames that are to be caulked do not have built-in stops or other means to prevent depth of compound from exceeding '/2 inch, pack joint with back-up materials of correct type and to the depth as necessary to provide minimum %" and maximum'/2" depth of compound. D. Materials and methods shall be as specified herein, unless they are contrary to approved manufacturer's directions or to approved trade practice; or unless Contractor believes they will not produce a watertightjob which he will guarantee as required. Where any part of these conditions occur, Contractor shall notify Architect in writing. Deviation from procedure specified will be permitted only upon Architect's approval and providing that work is guaranteed by Contractor as specified. E. If, prior to beginning work, Contractor does not notify Architect in writing of any proposed changes, it will be assumed that he agrees that materials and methods specified will produce results desired, and that he will furnish required guarantee. 3.02 PREPARATORY WORK A. Where weather molds, staff beads, etc., do not form integral part of frames to be caulked, but are removable, remove same priorto caulking, execute caulking, replace molds, etc., and point. B. Clean all joints, etc., that are to be caulked or sealed, prior to executing work. 3.03 PRIMING A. When conditions of joints so require, or when types of materials used adjacent to joints so require, or when compound manufacturer's recommendations so require, clean and prime joints before starting caulking. Execute priming operations in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3.04 JOINT BACKING 4219 A. Joint backing shall be installed in all joints to receive sealants. Backing shall be sized to require 20% to 50% compression upon insertion, and shall be placed so that sealant depth is approximately'/2 joint width. In joints not of sufficient depth to allow backing, install bond breaking tape at back of joint. CAULKING AND SEALANTS 07920 - 2 ii t. 3.05 APPLICATION A. Apply sealant and caulking material under pressure to fill joint completely, allowing no air } pockets or voids. Tool the joint.surface to compress the compound into the joint. 3.06 THRESHOLDS AND STOREFRONT SILLS A. Place all exterior door thresholds and storefront sills in a fill bed of sealant during setting procedures. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of caulking and sealant and clean all work of other trades that has in any way been soiled by these operations. Finished work shall be left in a neat and clean condition. END OF SECTION r r CAULKING AND SEALANTS 4219 07920 - 3 September 4, 200.1 MR' s SECTION 08115 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The extent of hollow metal doors and frames is shown on the drawings and schedules; all shall be custom hollow metal work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. D. Section 08115 - Steel Doors and Frames. E. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware. F. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hollow metal doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. In addition to other specified requirements, comply with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100), for the following classifications: 1. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, Minimum 16-gauge faces. B. Comply with latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards and Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. With manufacturer's standard details and specifications for steel doors and frames, submit shop drawings showing application to project, as required. B. Provide a written warranty letter per Section 01700, L8, on business letterhead stating that installed door components comply with TAS and/or ADA. ® 200] 5l ap an []aryey TO, I eetac, Inc. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08115-1 Unauthonzed Auphcation pro i Itepe . September4, 2001 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Hollow Metal: 1. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co. 2. Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel. 3. Tex -Steel Corporation. 4. Hol-O-Met, Inc. 5. Superior Door and Sash Company. 6. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Metal steel doors and frames; hot -rolled, pickled and oiled per ASTM A 569 and A 568; cold - rolled per ASTM A 366 and A 568. B. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra -heavy duty, Model 2, Minimum 16-gauge faces. C. Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard units. Use galvanized items for units built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp or buckle. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. B. Prepare steel doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping, complying with ANSI A 115 "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware". C. Reinforce units to receive surface -applied finish hardware to be field applied. D. Locate finish hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, per DHI "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware". E. Shop paint surfaces of doors and frame units, including galvanized surfaces, using manufacturer's standard baked -on rust -inhibitive primer. F. Doors: Comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated, for materials quality, metal gauges, and construction details. G. Frames: Comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated, for materials quality, metal gauges, and construction details. H. Provide standard hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings as indicated. Frames 6 feet wide and under shall be constructed of 16 gauge material. I. Prepare frames to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers of double -swing frames. J. Provide 26 gauge steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of hardware cutouts where installed in concrete, masonry or plaster openings. ©a°n�Prfi�hcZedP��to N6�' Inc. r,d�STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08115 - 2 W August 28, 2001 I. Prepare frames to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers of double -swing frames. J. Provide 26 gauge steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of hardware cutouts where installed in concrete, masonry or plaster openings. K. Protect inside faces of frames in plaster or masonry wall construction which are placed with anti -freeze additives, using high -build fibered asphalt emulsion coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow -metal units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final shop drawings. Fit doors to frames and floors with clearances specified in SDI-100. t _ B. Finish hardware is specified in Section 08700. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEANING A. Prime coat touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up paint of compatible air -frying primer. B. Final adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and A frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION e Iw ® 2001 Chapman tlaryey Areh1tects Inc. Unauthorized duplication pm1%11kted: STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08115 - 3 AFIRM September 4, 2001 ewe SECTION 08410 a, ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum doors, frames, and glazed lights. B. Glass. C. Door hardware. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System. B. Section 06400 - Architectural Millwork 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System performance to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by temperature cycling. B. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. C. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft. D. Design and size members to withstand dead loads caused by pressure and suction of wind. E. Drain water entering the framing system, to exterior. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system and component dimensions; components within assembly; framed openings requirements and tolerances; anchorage and fasteners; glass and iniills; door hardware requirements; and affected related work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01600 including coverage for insulated glass units. B. Provide a written warranty letter per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that installed door components comply with TAS and/or ADA. ®^an°norhzedTup tl ratio v o�,n6'te ° 1 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1 September 4, 2001 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Fabricators: 1. Kawneer: Trifab 450. a. Use 450 - 070 pivot mullions at non 90 degree corners. b. Use 451 - 011 intermediate frame. C. Use 451 - 110 steel insert for mullions. d. Use 450-067 outside comers. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 alloy. C. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209. D. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446; galvanized. E. Steel Sections: Structural shapes to suit mullion sections; galvanized. F. Primer: Zinc chromate for shop application and field touch-up. G. Fasteners: Galvanized steel. H. Sealant and Backing Materials: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.2 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 to the following type description:. 1. Glass in Exterior Lights: '/4" Tempered, gray tint. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly. B. Accurately and rigidly fit and secure joints and corners, flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view. D. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware and door operator hinge hardware. 2.4 FINISHES A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Clear Anodized. B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Clear Anodized. C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanize to 2.0 oz/sq ft. D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. ®a00h Cietl"�uplication prohh�ile`A� r"` ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2 September 4, 2001 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors, frames, glazing, hardware and flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions - AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to structure. C. Align assembly plumb and level and free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances and align with adjacent work. D. Coordinate attachment and seal of air and vapor barrier materials. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. E. Install hardware using templates provided. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from plane: 0.03 inches per foot maximum. END OF SECTION Unw°t;o zeiup oati n pro�h6`�te . Inc. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3 September 4, 2001 SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Complete sets of hardware for all new doors. New hardware is to match existing hardware manufacturer, style, type, finish, and installation heights. B. Butts and hinges, locks and latch sets, closers, push/pulls, trim units, kick plates, silencers, and miscellaneous items required for a complete installation. C. Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the drawings and/or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary and required for their completion. Any item of finish hardware not specifically mentioned, but which is necessary for proper completion of the work shown on the Drawings shall be provided without additional cost to owner. Any omissions shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening; otherwise the Drawings and Specifications will be considered complete. D. Exchange or replace all damaged existing door hardware with new hardware; no additional money shall be granted for such items. E. Exchange all existing door hardware that does not meet current Texas Accessibility Standards criteria with new hardware which does meet T.A.S. criteria; existing knobs replaced with levers of matching manufacturer and finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06400 - Architectural Millwork. B. Section 08115 - Steel Doors and Frames. C. Section 8410 - Aluminum Windows. D. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act, 36 CFR. B. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute. D. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association. 8n2OO h eny pirjhj�j auU rtz:S�anl= to F2., Inc. up FINISH HARDWARE 08700-1 1.5 1.6 September 4, 2001 E. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute. F. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. H. SDI - Steel Door Institute 1. ANSI Al15.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. J. ANSI A115.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting. K. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. L. ANSI A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim. M. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers). N. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. O. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinges. COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this section with other sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Hardware subcontractor shall examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of hardware quantities required. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware group, provide such door or item with hardware similar to that required for similar conditions on the project. Locks, bolts, hinges, pulls, levers shown on the plans for non -factory manufactured cabinet and casework shall be included in the Division of Finish Hardware. C. When new hardware is to match an existing owner's standard, new shall match in every way so long as it does not violate Texas Accessibility Standards criteria. New door hardware shall comply with T.A.S. Contractor shall confirm what is owner's standard prior to ordering material. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three year's experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial and institutional door hardware with five year's documented experience. C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of the section. Ua0dtlun te• Inc. Unauthorized pro, eFINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 2 I September 4, 2001 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101. C. Conform to criteria stated in the most current edition of the Texas Accessibility Standards. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01300. Resubmittals will be required until complete architectural approval is obtained. B. Indicate location and mounting heights of each type of hardware. Show required mortising and internal reinforcing of metal products. C. Provide product data on specified hardware. D. Submit keying diagrams to show grandmaster, master, etc. level of hierarchy. E. Submit proposed replacement levers, finish, function, and example of new hardware that is replacing existing hardware. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. C. Lost or stolen hardware shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Replace all items lost or stolen with identical items at no cost to owner. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. B. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secure area. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide a written warranty per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that installed door components comply with TAS and/or ADA. B. Provide warranties for all hardware furnished under this division to the general contractor for ..� transmittal to the architect. Warranties shall be for a period of one (1) year (five [51 years for ® au°tioCriied"CuptHca[i prokh6`� e`�•Inc. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 3 September 4, 2001 closer) from date of owner acceptance, against defects in material and workmanship of the merchandise. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Locksets and Latches: Sargent. B. Hinges: McKinney. C. Closers: Sargent. D. Exit Devices: Sargent. E. Kickplates, stops, and silencers: Trimco; Rockwood. F. Smoke seals: Pemko. G. All manufacturers shall match those currently being used by the City of Lubock. 2.2 STYLE A. All hardware components shall match throughout the facility in finish, style, and function. B. Provide a knurled grip or similar, acceptable texture on levers of doors leading to a;,potentiall., hazardous situation for a physically or visually challenged person; ie, mechanical rooms and stairs. 2.3 KEYING A. All cylinders are to be keyed alike or as instructed by the City of Lubbock. B. Supply two keys for each lock. C. Coordinate new keying system with owner. 2.4 FINISHES A. Finishes for new hardware are identified in the schedule at end of this section. Submit for architect's approval. B. Finishes for replacement of existing hardware is to match the existing finish. Submit for architect's approval. 2.5 EXIT DEVICES A. Sargent 8800 series, smooth mechanism case, designed for 1 3/4 " wood doors. B. Devices are intended for door openings without a mullion. C. Provide devices with concealed vertical rods. aooho Z�a2uplication prohh6`te`n. I FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 4 Y September 4, 2001 ! PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. C. The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection by a representative of the referenced organization to determine that the work of this Section has been performed in accordance with the specified requirements. D. In the event such inspection determines that the work of this Section does not comply with the specified requirements, immediately remove the non -complying items and immediately replace them with items complying with the specified requirements, all at no additional cost to the Owner, and reimburse the Owner for the cost of the inspection. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI, NAAMM, AWI, ANSI/NFPA 80, BHMA, DHI, and Texas Accessibility Standards. B. The contractor shall install all finished hardware plump, square, true and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, using the best practices as approved by architect. Hardware shall be fitted and operated prior to painting, then removed and painting completed before final installation. All hardware must be thoroughly cleaned, free from mars and blemishes and in perfect operating condition when turned over to the owner. Damaged or malfunctioning hardware will not be acceptable. C. No extra costs will be allowed to facilitate proper installation of any hardware. The general contractor shall be responsible for the proper fabrication of all materials and work to receive hardware. D. Finish hardware shall be furnished with all necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size use and long life and shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. These fastenings shall be furnished where necessary with expansion shield, security bolts, toggle bolts or other approved anchors according to the material to which it is applied and recommended by the manufacturer. All hardware fastened to concrete shall be furnished with machine screws and lead shields. Extension flushbolts shall be edge mounted in all cases. Wrought box strikes shall be furnished where strikes are mortised into wood. Strikes shall have sufficiently extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch -bolts, but no more than necessary. Strikes for pairs of doors shall have 1" lips to center. All backsets of locks and latches shall be 2-3/4" from the door edge unless otherwise indicated. E. Hardware for fire doors shall conform to the requirements for NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. In case of conflict between the type of hardware specified in these specifications or the type required for fire protection, materials of equal quality and design required by NFPA, shall be furnished, at no additional cost to owner. eu"au0hofized"�uplicaionpro�';6`�e`' FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 5 September 4, 2001 3.3 HANDICAP ACCESSIBILITY PROVISIONS A. Door Hardware: Handles, levers, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible doors shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor or ground surface and shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or severe twisting to operate. The force required to activate door hardware shall be no greater than five lbf. Designs include lever -operated mechanisms, push -type mechanisms and U-shaped handles. When sliding doors are fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. Doors to hazardous areas such as loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, and to other areas that might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made identifiable to the touch by a textured surface on the door handle, lever, pull or other operating hardware. This textured surface maybe made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to the contact surface. Such textured surfaces shall not be provided for emergency exit doors or any doors other than those to hazardous areas. B. Door Closer: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to an open position of approximately 12 degrees. C. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall comply with this paragraph. For hinged doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door opener or 30 inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For sliding or folding doors, the force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull or latch. 1. Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 8.5 lbf. Slight increases in opening force shall be allowed where 8.5 lbf is insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials.. 2. Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors shall not require a force exceeding five lbf. 3. Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force allowed by the governing authority or applicable building code. D. Thresholds: The height of any floor level change plus the height of any applied threshold at doorway sills shall no exceed 1/2" and shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1" in 2". E. Conform to latest adopted version of the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas Accessibility Standards criteria for positioning, operating, and opening force requirements. In case of conflict, materials of equal quality and design required by ADA or TAS shall be provided. 3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. Adjust any of the following heights, as required to maintain the existing standards established by the owner. B. Locks, latches: Finish floor to C/L of knobs, 40-5/16" C. Deadlocks: Finish to C/L of cylinder, 48" D. Push/Pull Plates: Finish floor to C/L of plate, 46" E. Flushbolts: C/L of bolt face to top (and bottom) edge of floor, 12" F. Exit Devices: Per template and installation instructions; Rails shall not conflict with door lites, mounting heights shall be adjusted to center exit rail on appropriate door rail. ®2001 Czepman�iaryeyArg176t�ctS,Inc. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 6 Unauthorized dupucatton profit tte . W September 4, 2001 G. Closer, O/H Holders: Per template and installation instructions. H. Stops: To protect doors and hardware from contact with parts of the building or other conflicting doors. I. Butt Hinges: 1. Top anchor butt - per template instructions; 2. Top butt hinge - top edge of butt leaf to rabbet, 5" 3. Bottom butt hinge - bottom edge of butt leaf to finish floor, 10" 4. Intermediate butt hinge - equal distant between top and bottom butts. 3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE r* A. Within thirty (30) days after Owner Acceptance of the Project, the subcontractor shall meet with the Owner's maintenance foreman and thoroughly instruct him in the care and adjustment of all movable hardware furnished under this division. Provide him with a Manufacturer's Parts List for all locks, exits and closer, a Bound Care and Adjustment Manual, and an adjustment tool for each type of adjustable hardware. Included shall be a copy of an approved Hardware Schedule. `°'" 3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE PRESSBOX: HDW SET #1 DOOR #lP EACH TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES TA2714 - 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US32 MCKINNEY 1 EACH LOCKSET 1005 LI US32D SARGENT 1 EACH KICKPLATE 10" X 2" LDW US32 ROCKWOOD (interior face) 1 EACH STOP 409 US32 ROCKWOOD 1 SET GASKETING S88D BLACK PEMKO 1 EACH DOOR SHOE 216AV ALUM PEMKO A, 1 EACH THRESHOLD 270A ALUM PEMKO HDW SET #2 DOORS #2P and #3P EACH TO HAVE: 2 EACH HINGES TA2714 — 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US32 MCKINNEY 1 EACH LOCKSET 1005 LJ US32D SARGENT 1 EACH GASKETING S88D BLACK PEMKO n 02 tInc.hp�'r FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 7 CONCESSION AND TOILETS: GATES #1CT and #3CT EACH TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES TA2714 - 4 1h X 4 1/2 US32 MCKINNEY Balance of hardware by steel fabricator. HDW SET #4 DOORS #2CT EACH TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES TA2714 - 4 1/z X 4 1/2 US32 MCKINNEY 1 EACH LOCKSET 1005 LJ US3213 SARGENT 1 EACH STOP 409 US32 ROCKWOOD 3 EACH SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO HDW SET #5 DOORS #4CT and #7CT EACH TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES TA2714 - 4 1/2 X 4 1/z US32 MCKINNEY 1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 12-8813 ETL US32D SARGENT 1 EACH PULL/PLATE 110-RM302/70A US32 ROCKWOOD — (omit pull at Door #7, exit only) 1 SET GASKETING S88D BLACK PEMKO 1 EACH KICKPLATE 10" X 2" LDW US32 ROCKWOOD _ (interior face) 1 EACH CLOSER EB350-P9 X TB US32D SARGENT 1 EACH DOOR SHOE 216AV ALUM PEMKO 1 EACH THRESHOLD 270A ALUM PEMKO HDWE SET #6 DOORS #5CT and #6CT EACH TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES TA2714 - 4 1/z X 4 1/2 US32 MCKINNEY — 1 EACH LOCKSET 1005 LJ US32D SARGENT 1 EACH CLOSER EB350-P9 X TB US32D SARGENT 1 SET GASKETING S88D BLACK PEMKO — 1 EACH DOOR SHOE 216AV ALUM PEMKO 1 EACH THRESHOLD 270A ALUM PEMKO END OF SECTION ®"a00noflZedduplicatY.. '.`�h6` edI FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 8 September 4, 2001 MIA PR 4w,a MR SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass and glazing for sections referencing this section for products and installation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 08410 - Aluminum Windows. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. B. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. C. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. D. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. E. FGMA - Glazing Manual. F. FGMA - Sealant Manual. G. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. H. FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release Type. I. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compounds, Synthetic -Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically Curing. J. FS TT-S-01543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base. K. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Mental) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for Channel or Stop Glazing). L. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual. ® 2007 Chap an }[arvey Ar hgr ,Inc. Unauthonzed�uphcaLon pro�r��uetd. GLAZING 08800 - 1 September 4, 2001 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Glass and glazing materials of the section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with 1985 U.B.C. in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data on glass types specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling, or installation requirements. C. Product data on glazing compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: 1. Submit 2 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. 2. Submit 12" x 12" piece of each glass indicated. E. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate special precautions required. F. Manufacturer's certificate: Certify that glass meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings. B. Actual site measurements are the responsibiity of the contractor. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01040. ® a00n Z"ea° ��p'cet�ion pro h6` icetl' Inc GLAZING 08800 - 2 September 4, 2001 B. Coordinate the work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent work. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.2 2.3 A. PPG Industries, Inc. B. Ford Glass Division C. ASG Industries D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 MATERIALS - GLASS A. Tempered Glass - Tinted 1. Type: Fully tempered light. Equal to PPG Solar Gray. 2. Light Transmittance: 21 % 3. Light Reflectance: 35% 4. Shading Coefficient: 0.45 5. Thickness: 1/4 inch 6. Conformance: ASTM 1048-85, Quality q3. GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Shall conform to ASTM C669 and as required by the glazing manufacturer. B. Butyl Sealant (Type GC-B): FS TT-S-001657; Shore A hardness of 10-20 black color; non - skinning. C. Acrylic Sealant (Type GC-C): FS TT-S-00230, Type II, Class A; single component; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25; color as selected. D. Polysulphide Sealant (Type GC-D): FS TT-S-00227, Glass A Type II; two component; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25; color as selected. E. Polyurethane Sealant (Tupe GC-E): FS TT -5-00230, Type II -non -sag, Class A; as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Silicone Sealant (Type GC-F): FS TT-S-01543, Class A; single component; chemical solvent curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25 color as selected. 0200'C4tPnan Harvey Ar%hc Inc. Jnauthordup1raton pro ibita GLAZING 08800-3 2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long _ x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. — D. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; color: black. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Provide testing and analysis reports of glass under provisions of Section 01400. ® a00no hee'� P '�a[,on prof�h6` t,W:'"` GLAZING 08800 - 4 w, - September 4, 2001 - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify prepared openings under provisions of Section 01040. ems+ B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to r� receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. �• B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Remove all evidence of existing putty glazing from existing steel frames scheduled to be reglazed. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with referenced FGMA standards and instructions of manufacturers of glass, glazing sealants, and gaskets, to achieve airtight and watertight performance, and to minimize breakage. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during �• installation and discard pieces with edge damage that could affect glass performance. C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. 3.4 CLEANING ts- A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. _.. C. Remove labels after work is complete. R" D. Clean glass. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01500. B. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. C. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. ® 2001 Cha anrgaV Ar h test Inc. una�thorizad�aplicat'.7".tt6ited�. GLAZING 08800 - 5 September 4, 2001 D. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. — E. Remove and replace glass which is broker, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. — END OF SECTION a Unau0h nzenuplication pro�i6iteo. Inc GLAZING 08800 - 6 - September 4, 2001 SECTION 09511 !"^ SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL a 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 GENERAL NOTES A. This contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all acoustical ceiling work as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. This contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installation of all accessories required for the completion of the work. B. See reflected ceiling plan for locations of electrical and mechanical items related to the acoustical ceilings. Cooperate with electrical and mechanical contractors to insure a first class appearance in the completed work. 1.3 RELATED SECTION A. Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation 1.4 COOPERATION A. This contractor shall consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows ceiling installation to permit orderly procedure in executing work under this contract. Installation of tile shall not start until foundation work to receive the tile has been obtained to proceed. The contractor shall give the architect advance notices for such operations. B. The contractor shall inspect personally all surfaces to receive material and shall report to the architect any defects or conditions which would affect his installation. C. When crown molding is included in project, this contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the carpentry contractor to see that a uniform border is maintained around the ceiling area. 1.5 WARRANTY A. This contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of his work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the warranty. B. The following shall be judged as defective work:, loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of material. 1.6 SUBMITTAL A. Submit to the architect for approval four sets of manufacturer's literature describing the ceiling boards and suspension system proposed for the project. ®� Iwo =�a2�Po vr,%h6`pe Inc.SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 September 4, 2001 PART 2 2.1 PRODUCT MATERIALS A. Ceiling board shall be 24 x 48 x 5/8 inches square edged, random fissured mineral fiber with an NRC of at least .50 to .60, STC of 35 to 39, Class A rating, and a white color coating. 1. USG Interiors, Inc. — OMNI 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. — MINABOARD B. Exposed suspension system shall be equal to DONN, DX system, white enameled steel. Main beams shall be generally spaced at 48 inches on center except where light fixture locations dictate a 24 inch spacing. Use 48 inch cross tees and 24 inch sub cross tees. Wall angle shall be white enameled steel. Provide an intermediate -duty classification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXPOSED SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. The contractor shall employ workmen who are experienced in the erection of the types of ceilings specified and shall maintain competent supervision of the work at all times. B. Erect runner level and true to the elevation shown on the drawings. Start channels a minimum of 1 foot from walls, and space 4 feet on center thereafter. Where splices occur in channels, use special splice bars as furnished with system specified. C. Lay out ceiling work symmetrically in the various rooms with no less than one-half tile at the walls. Cut tile accurately around electrical outlets. D. Upon completion of the work, all tile shall be cleaned and left free form defects of any kind. With the approval of the architect, small abrasions, etc., may be touched up with paint. E. In general, lighting fixtures of fluorescent type shall be suspended directly on the runner bars. Where fixture centers between two runner bars, both shall be main runner bars. See reflected ceiling plans for fixture locations. F. The use of wall angles to support more than 1 foot of suspended acoustical board ceilings will not be permitted. 3.2 HANGERS A. Hanger wires shall be #12 soft annealed wire. Hanger wires shall be plumb and taut in the completed work. Slanting of hanger wires will not be permitted unless an equal and opposite hanger wire is installed to offset the thrust of the original wire hanger. This may be done only with the expressed permission of the architect. B. Where hanger wires occur directly under ductwork or other overhead obstructions, provide a trapeze of 1-1/2 inch channel iron. Install regular hanger wire at proper location along the length of trapeze. C. The use of bridging angles spanning between bar joists is expressly forbidden for attachment of hanger wires for supporting ceiling suspension systems. D. Hanger wires shall be attached to the bottom chords of bar joists or to special scissor clips attached to steel subpurlins supporting the roof deck. a00ho Zea`3�p'. oen p kh6,r�a�:'"e SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 September 4, 2001 E. Where acoustical board ceilings occur below concrete structural members provide power driven studs with eyes into vertical face of concrete joists. INSTALLATION OF TILES A. Contractor shall only install ceiling tiles in which a building system is anchored to or through the tile in order to complete the installation of the building system. 1. Once Phase I is complete and systems are operational, the contractor shall schedule with the architect a pre -final building system walk through. 2. Do not install ceiling tiles that do not support a building system component, building systems are to be visible. B. Phase II: After pre -final walk through and all corrective work is completed, install balance of ceiling tiles. 1. Complete ceiling system is to be installed prior to final project walk through. EXTRA TILE A. Upon completion of the work furnish to the owner one unopened carton of each type of acoustical board installed in the project. END OF SECTION ® 200no b '2�p '�aLlon 'A,1',� ,e n, Inc.SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 September 4, 2001 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this ..; Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface preparation. B. Surface finish schedule. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS r: . „ A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. B. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System c C. Section 08115 - Steel Doors and Frames. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related r Products. F' B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 77 C. SSPC - SP1 - Solvent Cleaning D. SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning ° 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years documented experience. C. Flame Spread: Interior finishes must meet Class II flame spread, 26-75 index, or less. ®a�°nonied tlUpl,cai on Inc. PAINTING 09900 - 1 September 4, 2001 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data on all finishing products. B. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. C. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled, after color selection. D. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 01300. E. Certify that material installed on this project does not contain insecticide, mildewcide, and no more than 0.06 percent lead. 1.8 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide one field sample panel, 12 inches long by 12 inches wide, illustrating special texture, and finish. B. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labelled containers; inspect to verify acceptanc`e':` D. Container labelling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45' F and a maximum of 90' F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 55" F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 55' F for interiors; 65' F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65' F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions, ® a�°o zed`�upiioatlonprohh6tte Inc. PAINTING 09900 - 2 - - - - September 4, 2001 E. Provide lighting level of 50 footcandles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA STOCK t A. Provide two gallon containers of each color and surface texture to owner. B. Label each container with color, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT A. Glidden Coatings and Resins Division of SCM Corporation. ems! B. PPG Industries, Inc. Coatings and Resins Division. C. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc. r- D. Sherwin Williams Company. E. Monarch Paint Company. " F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners, and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. 2.3 FINISHES _ A. Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION ►�"" 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. m� B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. ! 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. ® 2001 Chapman Haryey Arr�h6tpcW, Inc. PAINTING 09900 - 3 < Unauthonzed duplication proire . September 4, 2001 4. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to completely and thoroughly dry. H. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 1. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. J. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items. K. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. L. Concrete Paving Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. M. Hollow Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this section. U 2001 Chapman Haryey Arkn6tect ,one. PAINTING 09900 - 4 Unauthorized dup icatwn pro ite . September 4, 20DI C. Furnish drop cloths, shields and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than proceeding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. H. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. I. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. J. Apply new paint as specified on new and renovated existing surfaces. The entire renovated surface shall be painted, not just the repaired portion. Renovated surfaces shall be painted from floor to ceiling, comer to comer, or break in surface plane. K. Repainting the entire surface (new, renovated, or existing): shall be required if the surface is damaged by construction activities. The architect will make the final determination. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 15 and Section 16 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit. B. Paint shop primed equipment. C. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, �*+ hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished. D. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidently. ,.. E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, and grilles, to match face panels. F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. sw G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. ® 2001 Chapman j-Iary Ar 17'tCct�, Inc. Unauthonzed duplication pro�ti��ted. PAINTING 09900 - 5 3.6 3.7 3.8 September 4, 2001 H. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify as required. I. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. CLEANING A. As work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of work, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING A. Metal Fabrications (Section 05500): Steel Bollards; Steel Channel Frame for Canopy. B. Grating & Floor Plates (Section 05530): Sidewalk Grate & Frame. SCHEDULE OF PAINTING A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those listed below. The types of paint are identified with Pittsburg Paint or Sherwin Williams numbers. B. The owner and architect shall select color, tint, and sheen from manufacturer's standard color chart. C. Exterior and Interior Metal: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel D. Interior Wood: For paint finish 1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel E. Interior Wood: For transparent finish 1. First Coat: Rez 77 line semi -transparent stain 2. Second Coat: PPG Speedhide 6-10 sanding sealer 3. Third Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer 4. Fourth Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer F. Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings 1. First Coat: PPG 6-2 Speedhide drywall sealer 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex enamel ®2001 Chap an Harvey Ar�h6t- Inc. PAINTING UnauthorizET.p cation pro Mel' 09900 - 6 I September 4, 2001 G. Galvanized Metal 1. First Coat: PPG 6-209 galvanized steel primer 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide enamel H. Concrete and Asphalt Pavement 1. First Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, 1L Line yellow unless noted otherwise. 2. Second Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, accessible parking zones to recieve a second coat. I. Concrete Unit Masonry 1. First Coat: SW ProMar B25 Block Filler 2. Second Coat: SW A-100 Satin Latex A82 3. Third Coat: SW A-100 Satin Latex A82 J. Concrete Walks 1. First Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, blue unless noted otherwise. Accessible ramps and sloped walks. END OF SECTION 200I Chapman to ev pr�h tyc Inc. PAINTING nauthorized auphcanon prohi6ned.' August 28, 2001 SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. High density resin toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. C. Partition Type: Floor mounted, headrail braced. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI Al 17.1 and applicable code for provisions for the physically handicapped. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan and elevation views, dimensions, details of floor supports, and door swings. B. Samples: Submit two samples, 6x6 inches in size, illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 11- 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Capital Partitions; Congress. B. Panel Construction: Poly -Pro advanced solid polymer resin; color to be selected by architect. C. Head Rails: Hollow aluminum channel. D. Attachments and Bolts: Steel, with heavy duty aluminum brackets. rM E. Steel Plate Internal Reinforcement: Carbon steel. 2.2 HARDWARE A. Hinges: Cast pivot hinges, gravity type, nylon bearings. B. Latch and Keeper: Thumb turn latch, door strike and keeper with rubber bumper. C. Coat Hook: Cast alloy, with rubber bumper tip. 8.0gQ=2 UP 4r Mea Inc. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -1 August 28, 2001 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with plastic laminate finish to faces and edges of core material. B. Doors and Panels: 1 inch thick, face pressure bonded to core. C. Pilasters: 1 1/4 inch thick, constructed same as doors. D. Pilaster Shoes: Formed chromed steel. E. Internal reinforcement: Provide for attached hardware and fittings. 2.4 FINISHES A. Hardware to be chrome. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that opening dimensions and plumbing fixture and rough -in locations are as instructed by the manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install partition components secure, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attached panel brackets securely using anchor devices. C. Provide adjustment for height variations with threaded rods through steel saddles. Conceal fastenings with pilaster shoes. D. Equip each door with two hinges, one door latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Equip out - swinging doors with additional bumpers. E. Adjust and align door hardware so that free movement is attained. END OF SECTION ®nan h Czed� plicatyon pro�ti6i[ed°'°` TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Aluminum flagpole. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide flagpole capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads as determined according to the building code in effect for this Project or NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide Specifications for Design Loads of Metal Flagpoles," whichever is more stringent. 1. Base flagpole design on maximum standard -size flag suitable for use with pole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent. 2. Basic Wind Speed: For Project location, 100 mph (45 m/s). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of flagpole required. Include installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show general layout, jointing, grounding method, and anchoring and supporting systems. 1. Include details of foundation system for ground -set poles. C. Structural Calculations: For flagpole indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Finish Samples for Verification: For each finished metal used for flagpole and accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each flagpole as a complete unit from a single manufacturer, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Spiral wrap flagpole with heavy kraft paper or other weathertight wrapping and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. r-► FLAGPOLE 4219 10350 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,., 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Saartol Co., Inc. 2. Concord Industries, Inc. 3, Eder Flag Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Ewing: John Ewing & Co. Inc. 5. ICC Manufacturing Co.; Morgan -Francis Div.; AABEC Pole Div. 6. Kearney -National Inc.; American Flagpole Div. 7. Lingo, Inc.; Acme Flagpole Co. Div, 8. Michigan Flagpole Inc. 9. Olympus Flag & Banner; EMC Div. 10. PLP Composite Technologies, Inc. 11. Pole -Tech Co., Inc. 2.02 Flagpole A. Pole Construction, General: Construct poles and ship to Project site in one piece, if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, provide snug -fitting precision joints with self -aligning, internal splicing sleeve arrangement for weathertight, hairline field joints. B. Aluminum Flagpole: Fabricate from seamless, extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241 (ASTM B 241 M), alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). Heat treat after fabrication to comply with ASTM B 597, temper T6. 1. Provide cone -tapered aluminum flagpole. 2. Provide entasis-tapered aluminum flagpole. C. Foundation Tube: Galvanized corrugated -steel foundation tube, 0.0635-inch (1.6-mm) minimum wall thickness, sized to suit flagpole and installation. Provide with 3/16-inch (4.8- mm) steel bottom plate and support plate; %-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges all welded together. Galvanize steel parts, including foundation tube, after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. D. Height: Thirty (30') feet above finish grade. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush -seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match pole -butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch (1.6-mm) spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole. B. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and * removable handle, stainless -steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic -coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole. FLAGPOLE 4219 10350 - 2 C. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide 4 swivel snap hooks per halyard, as follows: 1. Chromium -plated bronze. 2. Stainless steel. 3. Bronze. 4. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Concrete: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." B. Concrete: Provide concrete composed of portland cement, coarse and fine aggregate, and water mixed in proportions to attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi (20 MPa), complying with ASTM C 94. C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. D. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate. E. Elastomeric Sealant: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 2.05 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 91 recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. - Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare in -ground flagpole by painting below -grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Excavation: For foundation, excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure forms, foundation tube, fiberglass sleeve, or anchor bolts in position, braced to prevent displacement during concreting. D. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist -cure exposed concrete for not less than 7 days or use a nonstaining curing compound. E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to base perimeter. FLAGPOLE 4219 10350 - 3 .ON M® 3.02 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpole where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Foundation -Tube Installation: Install flagpole in foundation tube, seated on bottom plate 'Waft between steel centering wedges. Plumb flagpole and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch (50-mm) layer of elastomeric sealant and cover with flashing collar. F p END OF SECTION man F, FIR h r*! P" FLAGPOLE 4219 10350 - 4 September 4, 2001 SECTION 10440 SIGNS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Exterior Facility Sign attached to the public side of the Concession service area screen wall. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System. 1.4 SUBMITTALS F,w A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit letter style and colors for selection. tom. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide a minimum of 12 months on finish. B. Submit according to Section 01300. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Gravoply. B. Andco. 2.2 MATERIAL - EXTERIOR FACILITY SIGN A. Design intent is cast metal letters mounted on metal studs set into a masonry wall. B. Text: Allow up to 20 characters, text is a s shown on the drawings. C. Sign is to be mounted to face of masonry service area screen wall PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING x� A. All letters shall be securely anchored to resist damage during high winds. B. Locate signs where shown on drawings or directed by the architect. ® 2001 Chap an aryey Arch t,,t�, Inc. c+ Unauthori Hu-p Hcsuon proc t��ted. SIGNS 10440 - 1 September 4, 2001 C. Provide mounting information along with product data submittals. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean signs and adjacent surfaces of any adhesive residue, mastic, concrete, mortar, etc. B. Protect signs from damage until substantial completion is accomplished and accepted by the Architect. C. Remove all protective covers, wrappings, or tape prior to substantial completion. END OF SECTION z0o1 chap an rlarvey nr�h6tf"�' Inc. SIGNS 10440 - 2 Unauthonzed�upLcaaon pro t rte . "- PM September4,2001 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this - Section. '^ 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Fire extinguishers. ¢: B. Cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS """ A. Section 04340 — Reinforced Unit Masonry System. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Directory. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 10 - Requirements for Extinguishers. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for rated assemblies. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include physical dimensions, fire rating, operational features, color and details. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. B. Included test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures and re -certification requirements. u"a°1h1. Z%% pR 'o P oRh6t �`e Inc.FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 - 1 September 4, 2001 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing. B. Install extinguishers only after the interior temperatures are controlled. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES — A. J.L. Industries. B. Larson Fire Protection & Safety Equipment. C. Modem Metal Products by Muckle. _ 2.2 EXTINGUISHERS A. Multi -Purpose Dry Chemical Type: Steel tank, Model Cosmic 10E manufactured by J.L. Industries, with pressure gauge, UL rated 4A-60BC. 2.3 CABINETS - A. Cabinet: J.L. Industries Ambassador model 1015 Fire-FX, formed sheet steel, 18 gauge primed, recessed type, tub inside dimensions of 10 1/2 x 24 x 6 inches. Electrostatic white epoxy finish. B. Trim: Flat, 1 1/4 inches wide face. C. Door: Contemporary V, 18 gauge thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch only. D. Glass: 1/4 inch clear tempered glass. — E. Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for anchorage. C. Form perimeter trim (and door stiles) by welding, filling and grinding smooth. — D. Hinge doors for a 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. 2.5 FINISHES A. Extinguisher: Red enamel. B. Cabinet Trim and Door: Paint to match adjacent wall. C. Cabinet Interior: White enamel. _ ®"e�°nor,zed�uplicanon p o`hh6`edt`' Inc' FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 - 2 September 4, 2001 u PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings where shown on the drawings. B. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install cabinets so that center line of latch is 42 inches above finished floor. END OF SECTION A, ." k; Un.Uttfio(zetl tluplica(tYion prole°bt �`e Inc. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 - 3 N September 4, 2001 SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates Bars and Strips. C. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. D. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -dip) on Assembled Steel Products. E. ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. F. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. G. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. H. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI A117.1. ® 2001 Chap�rian Harvey Arphtec ,Inc. Unauthonud tluphcaoon proht�ned. TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 September 4, 2001 B. Comply with the latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories B. The Bobrick Company C. Bradley Corporation D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. D. Adhesive: Contact type, waterproof. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized tamperproof. F. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. G. Wall Grounds: Provide concealed grounds of 9 gage metal plates or fire resistant 2x wood blocking. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. F. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. G. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. ®a0tL2.'ea U Pli;caat on prod^6`te�, Inc.TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 m� September 4, 2001 H. Concealed grounds shall be at least 9 gage metal or 2 x 6 wood. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. B. Stainless Steel: 18 gauge type 304 satin finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Concealed grounds are to be securely anchored to partition framing. D. Installed grab bars must be able to support a steady force of 250 pounds. 3.4 ACCESSORY LOCATIONS A. In toilet rooms where only one sink is provided, provide a handicap accessible mirror. In toilet rooms where more than one sink is provided, provide one handicap accessible mirror above the accessible sink and one mirror above each of the non accessible sinks. B. Comply with the latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards, Chapter 4, location and mounting heights criteria. 3.5 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE Bobrick McKinney A. Grab Bars B-6206.99 x 36 B6206.99 x 42 9605-1736, 9605-F42 2561 Series Anchor Plate 9580 Wall Anchor Plate B. Mirrors B-290 18 x 44 170 18 x 44 C. Accessible Mirrors B-293 18 x 44 170T 18 x 44 D. Toilet Tissue Dispensers B-686 1430 D E. Soap Dispenser B-111 304 02001 chzedap an Harveycanon pro Arkn6��ss, Inc. ited. TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3 Unauthon�upnt September 4, 2001 F. Paper Towel Dispensers B-3941 (paper cups) 80294 (paper cups) G. Supply only products that are currently being used by the City of Lubbock. END OF SECTION 8"ao0honzed"�uplica ion p7okh��te`�°'"` TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4 SECTION 13122 SHADE CLOTH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications shall coverthe construction and installation of shade covers on the dugouts and other areas as shown on the plans. .a 1.02 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS A. Comply with the following codes and standards except as modified herein: 1. U.B.C., BOCA, and SBCCI. 1.03 SUBMITTALS - A. Submit to the Architect/Engineer four (4) copies of the shop drawings of the structures. Drawings shall be sealed and signed by the aforementioned design engineer who is under contract to the manufacturer, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The following list of manufacturers and suppliers are those known to be acceptable in this bid. This list is provided for the convenience of the Contractor in preparing his bid. 1. Sun Ports International, Inc. 3. Shade Concepts 8319 Chancellor Row Hunter Knepshield Dallas, Texas 75247 P.O. Box 260677 (214) 905-9500 Plano, Texas 75026-0677 (214) 905-9514 (800) 451-4138 (214) 850-5651 mobile Attn.: Ed Knepshield Dhaymann@sunports.com Attn.: Dot Haymann 2. Cedar Forest Products Co. Paul E. Allen Co., Inc. Rt. 1, Box 185 •� Italy, Texas 76651 (214) 483-6883 Fax (214) 483-7406 Attn.: Debra J. Finch 2.02 SHADESURE CLOTH A. Shadesure cloth shall be a knitted high density polyethylene (HDPE), color concentrated and ultra violet light stabilized, monofilament and tape yarn, in a relationship of 57% and 43% respectively. 1. Burst strength: 48 pounds per square foot. r" SHADE STRUCTURES 4219 13122 - 1 9 2. Approximate shade: 40% (light colors); 80% (dark colors). 3. Nominal thickness: 0.045 - inch. 4. Fire retardancy: ASTM E84-91A; Class I (FSI 10) Flamespread; Smoke -developed index (SDI) 30. 5. Conforms to: U.B.C., BOCA, and SBCCI. B. Contractor shall provide color samples for selection by the Owner. Provide a 5 year limited cloth warranty. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION SHADE STRUCTURES 4219 13122 - 2 PART 1 1.1 SECTION 15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the Runishing of all materials and labor as required for the installation of a plumbing system and heating and air conditioning system, all as shown on the drawings, as herein specified, or both. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements for work required under this section. m 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. This Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all submittal data covering proposed equipment to the n Architect for approval prior to installation. All equipment shall be submitted at one time in a bound folder with an index of submittal. 1.4 REGULATIONS A. All work shall be done in strict accordauceand compliance with State and Local Laws, together with regulations of the particular Utility Companies concerned. u B. Obtain permits as required by the local authorities. rm 1.5 DRAWINGS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Each Contractor shall check these drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings and/or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the Contract Documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work t^ E required by the complete Contract. B. The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and the extent of the work contemplated. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined after equipment has been approved by the Architect and as directed by the Architect. All materials or labor necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these specifications dWIbe furnishedby each Contractor without additional charge as if called for in these specifications or shown on the plans. w C. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions, supports or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary because of failure GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-1 0 to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. D. This Contractor shall thoroughly lay out all his work and check all conditions to insure that the work as shown on the Drawings can be installed without modifications. No material shall be fabricated or delivered to the job until these conditions have been determined. E. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to make changes during construction, if required, and no allowances will be made for prefabricated material or on job materials which can not be used due to actual conditions. 1.6 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Where manufacturer's names are mentioned in these specifications, it has been done, in most cases, in order to establish a standard. Where the phrase "or equal", or its equivalent is used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment, the products of others than the particular manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable,if of suitable type and construction, but any substitution must be of quality as good as, or better than, the named article. Where the phrase "or equal" or its equivalent, is not used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment only the products of the manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable. B. If the Contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials for that specifiedby name, he shall be fully responsible for all coordination with other trades involved. Any expense incurred because ■^* of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, fuel piping requirements resulting from such substitution shall be borne by the Contractor substituting other equipment. C. Upon being awarded the Contract for the work under one of the following sections, the Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days, submit for approval a complete list of the materials which he proposes to use. The list shall give the manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to every item and where submitted materials are different from that specified by name, the submission shall be accompanied by a complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data and drawings, necessary to give full and complete details for the completed installation. D. Any item on this list which is rejected because of unsuitability or interior quality, must be replaced by an acceptable item within two (2) weeks following notification of the Contractor of such rejection. If no satisfactory material is submitted within two (2) weeks, then the Architect reserves the right to notify the Contractor as to the type and make of materials he will be required to furnish. Six (6) copies of the material and the equipment list shall be furnished by the Contractor in neat and firmly bound brochures for approval. 1.7 PRECEDENCE A. The work covered in this section shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the ,. following sequence: 1. Soil and waste piping 2. Duct work 3. Cold and hot water piping - 4. Electric wiring GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-2 Fig 1.8 COOPERATION A. Each contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other contractors to properly coordinate their work, to avoid interference and delays, and arrange all parts of the work so as to harmonize in service and appearance with all other parts. . 1.9 INTERFERENCES A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor must harmonize the work of the different trades so that interference between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must be kept as close as possible to walls, ceiling, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish it must be furnished and installed by the contractor without additional cost to the Owner. B. Exact locations of mechanical and electrical outlets or equipment may be varied a reasonable amount by the Architect before installation without additional cost to the Owner. C. All equipment and controls shall be so located and arranged that all parts will be available for proper maintenance. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials shall be new, made in the U. S.A. and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from any defects. Materials and equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have established as standard, shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and sha11 bear their label. B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to the job and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of same. This will be provided until final acceptance of the job. C. Each Contractor shall provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all materials and equipment free from injury and damage. All new work likely to be damaged shall be covered during the day and at the end of each day. D. Each Contractor will furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract. E. The workmanship shall be in all respects, the highest grade and all construction in accordance with the best practice of the trade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SOUND ISOLATION A. To prevent sound transmission and vibration, all operating equipment shall be isolated from the building construction by means of mountings designed to obtain the highest efficiency of sound isolation. Isolator sizes and methods of installation shallbe in accordancewith the recommendations !� of Chapter 46 of the 1999 ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications." GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-3 No r 3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of these specifications shall furnish and install all foundations and supports required by equipment included in his work. B. All piping, both vertical and horizontal, shall be supported at sufficient close intervals to keep its alignment, prevent sagging and to prevent pipe from being supported by equipment or equipment connections. C. Vertical pipes shall be supported from floor with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and adequately support their weight. Vertical copper tubing, 1-1/4" and smaller shall be supported at 3' intervals and at the base of pipe risers, where required for proper support. Hangers shall be manufacturedby Kindorff, Unistrut, Elcen or equal. Where multiple pipes are indicated, they may be supported on '^ a continuous hanger. All hangers must meet the Architect's approval. Use of perforated straps will not be permitted. D. All horizontal pipes suspended with structure above shall be supported by hanger rods of the following size: 1. Pipes up to and including 2" 3/8" rods 2. 2-1/2" and 3" pipe 1/2" rods 3. 4" and 5" pipe 5/8" rods 4. 6" pipe 3/4" rods E. Where pipes are supported from overhead concrete construction, the hanger rods shall be provided as detailed on the plans. F. Soil pipe shall be supported at all turns and at intervals not to exceed 5' on centers on straight runs. The following table gives maximum hanger spacing for copper and steel lines but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessary: SIZE OF LINE 3/4" and smaller 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" to 4" Larger than 4" HANGER SPACING 5' 6' 7, 8' 10, 12' G. If pipes of different Contractors can be racked on the same supporting structure, each Contractor shall cooperate with the other involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall famish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation.. 3.3 FLASHING A. Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 4 lb. sheet lead. Flashings shall extend not less than eight inches (8") from the vent pipes in all directions, shall be extended up the ventpipes a minimum of six inches (6") at which point threaded standard cast-iron or malleable -iron recess roof couplings shall be installed to form counter -flashing or rain guards. Flashings in connection with cast-iron pipe vents shall be tamed down into the pipes or hubs. Roof drains shall be flashed as detailed on the drawings. Flashings in metal roofs shall be made with Dektite flashings or approved equal. GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-4 i A 3.4 FIRE PARTITIONS A. Any penetrations through a fire wall or floor shall have the ancillar space sealed with a fire retardant material such as Link -Seal or equal. Fire and smoke dampers shall be installed where required or as shown on the drawings. 3.5 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPES A. Swing joints, turns, expansion loops, or long offsets, shall be provided wherever shown on the drawings, and where necessary to allow for the expansion of piping within the building. Broken pipes or fittings due to rigid connection shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Anchors shall be installed where shown or required to control expansion of piping system. Anchors shall be of the clamp type securely fastened to the building structure. 3.6 UNIONS A. Unions shall not be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building unless shown on drawings or specified. Unions shall be installed on both sides of all '= valves, regulators, check valves, traps, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected. Where copperpipe joins iron or steel pipe, an insulation union using a "Bakelite" insulator shall be used. 3.7 ESCUTCHEONS A. Where exposed to view, pipes insulated or bare, passing through floors, walls, or ceilings, shall be filled with near, heavy spun or stamped steel escutcheons, firmly secured to the pipes. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to surround both the pipe and the sleeves. The sleeve shall have a nickel plated finish, fabricated in one piece and shall be firmly anchored in space. "Snap -on" type escutcheons will not be permitted. 3.8 PAINTING A. No painting will be required under this section. 3.9 TESTING A. This contractor shall test all plumbing lines and equipment as described under "Testing' section of these specifications. 3.10 ELECTRICAL A. Electric motors. shall be of the speed, phase and voltage as specified and shall be of type recommended by motor manufacturer for type of service involved. B. The Contractorfurnishing the motor shall install it. The Contractor shall furnish such motor controls and starting equipment as specified or as required. The erection and connection of all switches, starting and control equipment, and the wiring of same, shall be done as required. Conduits from controllers to motors shall be flexible for not over three feet (T) and shall be attachedto the terminal housing of the motor. All flexible conduit to motor shall be waterproof type with neoprene jacket. C. Where automatic controls are called for in the Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning specifications, the control instruments, such as motorized damper motors, motorized valves, '"°" GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-5 lmo i thermostats, etc., shall be installed by the Contractor furnishing the controls, but all wiring necessary shall be done by the Electrical Contractor. The Contractor furnishing the controls shall furnish a control wiring diagram to the Electrical Contractor. D. Starters on air cooled condensing units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. Starters for Heating and Ventilating units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 3.11 PIPE SLEEVES A. Each contractor shall provide sleeves for service lines passing through walls, roof or floors, subject to Architect's approval and/or as shown on the Drawings. Pipes passing through interior wall sleeves shall be free to move through sleeve. Sleeves exposed to view shall be equipped with cast brass escutcheons. B. All sleeves installed in verticalposition shall be constructed of standard weight galvanized steel pipe. All sleeves in horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel or extra heavy cast iron pipe unless otherwise noted, welded to steel plate in vertical position as detailed on the drawings. Pipe sleeve diameter shall be a minimum of 2 diameters larger than the outside of pipe passing through same, and a minimum of 1" larger than pipe plus insulation. Insulation shall pass thru sleeves. C. Where pipe extends through exterior walls below grade, oversize pipe sleeves, 2 diameters larger, made of standard weight steel pipe shall be used, and the annular space between service pipe and sleeves shall be filled with picked oakum and cement, or lead where required, to make a waterproof joint. D. All sleeves shall be installed flush with finished surfaces and/or as detailed on the Drawings. Copper pipes passing through steel pipe sleeves shall be installed with rubber insulation between pipe and sleeves. Isolator insulation shall be similar to Johns -Manville Aeratube. E. Where any pipe passes through fire walls, smoke walls, and concrete slabs between floors, the Contractor shall furnish and install fire seals, U.L. listed, type LS, link -seal, as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., or approved equal. Fire and smoke seals shall be installed in steel pipe sleeve of correct size for pipe and insulation. 3.12 INSULATING COUPLINGS A. This Contractor shall furnish and install insulating couplings whereverpiping material changes from galvanized steel pipe to copper, or from black steel to copper, and where shown on the drawings. 3.13 INSULATION A. Furnish and install pipe, duct, and equipment insulation as specified under "Insulation" section of these specifications. 3.14 EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS A. This Contractor shall make final connections of waste, water, and ventilation systems to items furnished by others. Furnish all traps, shutoff valves, wiring connections as required for a complete system. GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-6 3.15 LABELS A. This Contractor shall label allvalves with permanent metal name tags, 1-1/2" diameterby 3/16" thick ¢" brass name tags. Each tag shall describe fully the function of each valve by a stamped number on each side of tag and legend mounted under glass in each Mechanical Room. Each tag shall be applied to the handle of each valve with a hog ring and wrench. B. Heating and air conditioning units shall have a permanent metal tag or laminated plastic (min. thickness .093 inch) attachedby riveting to identify as shown on the drawings. Letters on tag shall be 1/4" to 3/8" in height. 3.16 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. All exposed pipes passing through floors, ceiling, or walls shall be provided with approved nickel or chromium plated cast brass ceiling plates securely attached with set screws. 3.17 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 3.18 INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. Furnish four (4) complete bound copies of Instruction Manuals on. all operating equipmentto Owner. Manuals: complete with repair instructions, replacement parts list, and complete operating instructions and wiring diagrams. 3.19 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENT'S A. After completion of the work but before final payment is made, the Contractor shall run test over a sufficient period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of apparatus, etc., and of system as a whole to the approval of the Architect and Engineer. See Testing section of the Specifications. 3.20 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship and material against defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance, unless specified otherwise in other sections of this specification. END OF SECTION �" GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-7 FOR s� SECTION 15020 TESTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide specified testing and testing as required by governing authorities. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable, clauses and regulations for other requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit a certificate signed by the job superintendent certifying that all tests have been satisfactorily completed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. All testing required under the contract of the plumbing contractor or heating and ventilating and air conditioning contractor shall be approved by the Engineer before acceptance. Provide the necessary valves for cutting off existing work not to be tested. B. The contractor shall perform the various tests as specified and as required by State and Local Authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. C. Any leaks or defective material found shall be repaired and replaced, and tests shall be repeated until no further leaks or defects are indicated. D. Drainage System: The entire drainage, roof drainage, and venting system shall have all necessary openings plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest vent stack without showing a drop of greater than four inches (4"). Where a portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted in the same manner as described for the entire system, except that a vertical stack ten feet (10') above the highest horizontal line to be tested may be installed and filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure, or a pump may be used to supply the required pressure. The pressure shall be maintained for four (4) hours. E. All Domestic Hot and Cold Water System: Upon completion of any part of the roughing -in and setting of fixtures, the entire hot and cold water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 lbs. per square inch gauge, stand proof tight at this pressure for not less than eight (8) hours. Each particular part of the hot and cold water system shall be tested as above specified. !" TESTING 15020-1 P" F. Gas Piping: All gas piping shall be tested under a pressure of 15" of mercury air pressure for a period of twenty-four (24) hours and be proof tight. G. Air Balancing: All supply and return air registers shall be balanced by the Contractor to supply CFM shown, and results of all tests, together with type of equipment used, shall be submitted to the Architect's office at completion of the job, and if the Architect deems it necessary, this Contractor shall perform such tests as may be necessary to illustrate to the satisfaction of the Architect that equipment installed performs properly. All balancing of air shall be done by the Contractor in the presence of the Architect's Field Representative. If Contractor does balance air systems, but work is not done in the presence of the Architect's field representative, all work shall be redone in the p^" presence of the Architect's field representative. H. All heating and air conditioning systems shall be tested for proper operation both in the heating ' season and cooling season. END OF SECTION PM TESTING 15020-2 SECTION 15060 PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This contract shall include the furnishing and installation of all labor and material necessary to complete all plumbing and gas fitting as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING GENERALLY A. Type of piping for the various systems shall be as specified under specific headings. B. Pipe ends shall be square cut. Ends of pipes shall be reamed and shall be wiped clean to remove cuttings. Before installation, pipe shall be stood on end and rapped sharply to remove cuttings and other foreign material from interior. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and outside. C. Screwed joints shall be made with best linseed oil and graphite or "Jointite" used on male threads - only. Omit compound on two (2) end starting threads. D. Pipe shall be accurately cut to fit. Bending or springing of pipe will not be permitted. E. The various service pipes, valves, fittings, etc., running parallel with each other and near together shall be in line with each other and shall be kept a sufficient distance from each other and other work, to permit not less than 1/2" between finished coverings on the different services. F. No unions are to be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building unless so shown on drawings or specified. Unions must be installed on each side of all special valves, regulators, etc., and one (1) side of all check valves, thermostatic traps, and at all pieces of equipment such as pumps, condensers, tanks, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected. G. Each Contractor shall furnish all foundations, structural or pipe supports indicated or called for specifically, or that maybe required to support his particular equipment and material, unless hangers are definitely indicated as being furnished by others. All horizontal runs of piping shall be securely n supported by pipe hangers spaced not more than 10' apart, and closer when necessary to prevent sagging. Soil pipe shall be supported every 51. PIPING 15060-1 hi H. Perforated strap hangers will not be allowed for any part of hangers. I. Swing joints, offsets, and anchors shall be provided in piping where required to provide for and control expansion or contraction of pipe. J. All piping, except waste piping, shall be installed above finished first floor slab, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Locations for various kinds of pipe materials shall be in accordance with the schedule following: 1. Plastic DWV pipe and fittings: a. Sanitary drainage piping unless designated otherwise. b. Aboveground vent and drainage piping. 2. Type L hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings: a. Aboveground domestic water piping within the building 4" and smaller in size. b. Drainage pipe where shown on the drawings. 3. Type K hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings: " a. Condensate piping from refrigerant cooling coil to floor drain, or waste line. 4. Standard weight black steel pipe, Schedule 40, with screwed malleable fittings: a. Aboveground gas piping within building. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COPPER WATER PIPING A. Pipe and tubing shall be cut accuratelyto measurements established at the building by the Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken the structural portions of the building. Piping aboveground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. Branches from service lines may be taken off top of main, bottom of main, or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and not less than 1/2" betweenfinished covering on the different services. No water piping shall be buried in floors unless specifically indicated on the drawings or approved. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of long screws and bushing will not be permitted. Where contractor connects copper to galvanized steel piping or hot water heaters, furnish and install insulating couplings. B. Drains indicated on the drawings in connectionwith the water distribution system shall be 1/2" brass plugs. Additional drains shallbe installed at low points on the hot-water and cold-waterpiping, and all piping shall grade down to the drains. C. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction or tubing. Horizontal runs of tubing over 50' in length shall be anchored to the wall or to the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. rr+ PIPING 15060-2 i D. Air chambers shall be provided on both hot and cold supplies near each faucet or control valve, as applicable, and where not definitely shown on the drawings shall consist of a 12" length of tubing of the same diameter as the branch supply, fitted with a cap. E. Tubing shall be cut square, and buns shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with steel wool before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and tubing when making connections. All joints shall be made with fittings. Joints for aboveground soldered fittings shall be made with a non -corrosive paste flux and solid string silver solder, and all underground joints shall be made with silfos only. Cored solder will not be permitted. Threaded swing joints shall be provided on all branch connections to mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of tubing. 95-5 solder shall be used to make joints extending to fixture only. 3.2 SANITARY PIPING A. Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall be given a grade of 1/4" per foot where possible, but in no case less than 1/8" per foot. All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and above the roof lines as vents, except where otherwise specifically indicated. Where practicable, two or more vent pipes shall be connected together and extended as one pipe through the roof. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close a possible to the under side of the roof, with horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps in pipes, using fittings as required. Vertical vent pipes maybe connected into one (1) main vent riser above vented fixtures. Where circuit vent or wet vent from any fixture is connected to a vent line serving other fixtures, the connection shall be at least three feet (3') above the floor on which the fixtures are located to prevent the use of any vent line as a waste. Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two (2) or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. Branch connections to exterior downspouts shall terminate three inches (3") above finished grade. The cast-iron hub -and -spigot or no hub pipe inside of buildings shall be extended six inches (6") above ground where the lowest floor is self-supporting. This Contractor shall connect waste line from building to manhole as shown on the drawings. B. Changes in pipe size on waste, soil, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings of recessed reducers. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45 degrees wyes, half wyes, long -sweep bends unless otherwise directed, except that sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks, and short 1/4 bends of elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the change in direction of flow is from the horizontal to the vertical, and on the discharge from water closets. C. Joints shall be made as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. 3.3 GAS PIPING A. Gas piping shall be installed parallel with the building and water piping. In finished rooms, piping shall be run concealed in a vented space. Gas piping shall be run under floor slabs, only as specifically noted, and then shall be in Orangeburg or PVC airtight vented sleeves with metal fitting in an approved manner. B. Joints for steel pipe shall be made with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to the male thread only. After cutting and before threading, all pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. Threads shall be full cut, and not more than three (3) threads on the pipe shall remain exposed. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. Joints for polyethylenepipe shall be made with heat fusion couplings as recommendedby the manufacturer. �., PIPING 15060-3 s*� ra C. Make final connection to all items of equipment, as shown and required, using unions and shut-off valves in each location. 3.4 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER AND GAS VALVES AND FITTINGS A. Valves and fittings for all domestic cold water and hot water services shall be as follows: 1. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be ball valves. Valves 3" and larger shall be butterfly valves instead. 2. Gas service stops shall be Crane No. 1228. 3. Swing check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 137. Swing checks larger than 3" shall be Crane No. 14493. 4. Lift check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 366E. 5. Butterfly valves shall be Centerline Series LT or Crane #23 designed for 200 psi differential pressure bubble tight shut off up to 12" size and 150 psi above 12" size. Valves through 6" shall have a locking lever handle and above 6" shall have a gear operator with a memory stop. Valves shall be furnished with tapped frill lug iron bodies, type 316 s.s. discs, type 304 s.s. stems, EPT or EPDM seats and O'rings. 3.5 PIPE HANGERS AND FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Pipe hangers and fixture supports shall be furnished and set, and the Contractor shall be responsible for their proper and permanent locations. B. Horizontal runs of copper tubing shall be supported by approved steel plastic coated hangers spaced not more than 8' o.c. Horizontal runs of drainage and vent pipes shall be supported by adjustable expansion pipe hangers having bolted hinged loops and turnbuckles, or an approved equal. Hangers on drainage and vent pipe shall be spaced not more than 10' o.c. Hanger and collars shall be of size proportionate to the weight of the pipe supported. C. Fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner. Where secured to concrete or brickwork walls, they shall be fastened with brass expansionbolts. Expansion bolts shall be 1/4" brass bolts with 20 threads to the inch and of sufficient length to extend at least 3" into solid ,�... concrete or brickwork, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves or proper length to bring expansion sleeves in the solid concrete or brick wall. Where secured to file walls or partitions, they shall be fastened with 1/4" brass toggle or through bolts. Where through bolts are used, they shall be provided with plates or washers at back, set so that heads, nuts, and washers will be concealedby plaster. Bolts and nuts shall be hexagon, and exposed bolts, nuts, and screw heads shall be provided with chromium plated brass washers. D. Copperpipe hangers shall be similarto Grinnell No. 260 withplastic coating for non -insulated water piping and Grinnell No. 300 for insulated water piping. Drainage and vent pipe hangers shall be similar to Grinnell No. 590. E. All hot water supply and returnpiping shall be supported by approved steelhangers, spacednot more than 8' on centers, equipped with roller pipe supports equal to Fee and Mason, Figure No. 272. END OF SECTION PIPING 15060-4 SECTION 15250 INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This contract includes furnishing and installing all insulation specified herein. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION A. All insulation required under the Plumbing contract and Heating and Air Conditioning Contract shall be equal to and as manufactured by the Knauf Fiber Glass or Johns -Manville, and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. B. Insulation: 1. Cold Water Piping Within Building Lines - Shall be insulated with 1" thick fiber glass pipe insulation with a factory applied vapor barrier jacket. 2. Overhead Heating and Air Conditioning Sheet Metal Supply and Return Ducts - Shall be insulated with 3/4 lb. density 2" thick duct wrap with aluminum foil Kraft vapor barrier, and shall be secured to ductwork with an approved adhesive and be sealed and stapled in place. 3. Pipe Fittings - Insulate pipe fittings with Manville Zestons according to manufacturer's recommendation. 4. Contractor at his option may use interior duct liner in lieu of exterior insulation. Duct liner shall be 1.5 1b., 1" thick with neoprene spray one side. All transverse joints shall be protected against air erosion by properly sealing all edges and securing with sheet metal clips. Duct liner shall be secured with mastic, 100% coverage and clips 18" on center. C. Where insulation is to be applied inside of ducts, exterior insulation will not be required. D. Where insulation occurs inside of ducts, allowance shall be made in sheet metal ductwork to accommodate a total thickness of two inches. E. Condensate Lines - Shall be insulated with 1" thick fiber glass pipe insulation with a factory applied all service jacket with self sealing lap. 4^" INSULATION 15250-1 Im W+ 2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.3 SMOKE AND FLAME SPREAD A. All duct and pipe insulation shall have a flame spread no greater than 25 and a smoke developed rating no greater than 50. B. Canvas jacket shall have a flame spread rating not in excess of 50. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSULATION A. All insulation shall be applied to clean surfaces and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION INSULATION 15250-2 IMP ' SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART1 GENERAL .,e 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This contract will include the furnishings and installation of all labor and material necessary to complete all plumbing and gas fittings as shown on the drawings and as herein specified as follows: 1. Water supply and service. 2. System of sanitary drainage, venting and connection to all fixtures as shown on the drawings. 3. Gas supply system. 4. Furnishing and installation of all fixtures as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittals required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.2 FIXTURES A. Furnish and install all fixtures and products in accordance with fixture schedule as shown on the drawings and as listed in Fixture Schedule or the approved equal of other manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quantity of all fixtures, drains, valves, etc., as shown, as herein specified or as required to make his installation complete. Lavatory and sink hot and cold water supplies shall be provided with chromium plated wall stops and chromium plated supplies. Immediately upon award of the contract, this Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, a brochure giving a complete description of all fixtures, equipment and fittings which he proposes to use. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the drawings. All plumbing fixtures, floor drains, etc., shall be equipped with tamperproof screws. B. Contractor shall connect all owner furnished equipment and furnish all traps and shutoff valves. PLUMBING 15400-1 P" 2.3 TRAPS A. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections at the drainage system shall be equipped with a trap. Traps installed on hub -and -spigot pipe shall be extra -heavy cast-iron. Traps installed on threaded pipe shall be recess drainage pattern. All basement floor drains shall be equipped with a deep seal trap. Omit "P" traps at each floor drain in shop areas that feed into sandtrap. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, except that cleanout plugs larger than 4" will not be required. Cleanouts and access covers at finished walls and exterior walls shall b e Wade Co. 8570-R N.B. cover and at finished floors shall be Wade Co. 8550-5 with Wade No 8300-S 42, N.B. cover, or the approved equal. Omit access covers for cleanouts in other locations. All wall covers shall be cadmium plated, and all floor cleanouts shall be polished nickel bronze flush with finish floor. Cleanouts exterior to the building shall be Wade Co. 7100-X with 9" x 9" access cover set flush with finish grade in 16" x 16" concrete pad, or as detailed on the drawings. 2.5 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, a Model Z-1376, Zurn stainless steel access door, size as noted on the drawings, or specified elsewhere. Install gate valves behind doors as shown. Doors shall be provided with hexed locks, all keyed alike. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Cross Connections and Interconnections: No plumbing fixtures, device or piping shall be installed .y which will provide a cross connection or interconnectionbetween a distributing supply for drinking or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as a drainage system of a soil or waste into the water supply system. B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the Plumbing System all fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings having plumbing connections and which are furnished and installed by others or are specified in other sections of these specifications. C. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. Where pipes extend through concrete members, this Contractor shall core all such members and slabs, unless sleeves have been provided. Chipping concrete will not be allowed, and if any coring of the concrete members is necessary, this contractor shall call it to the Architect's attention before doing same. D. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of the work the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. 3.2 STERILIZATION A. The entire cold water piping system shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing not less than fifty (50) parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution and shall be introduced into the system in a manner approved by the Architect. The sterilizing solution shall PLUMBING 15400-2 W be allowed to remain in the system for a period of 24 hours, during which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. All residual of 4 ppm shall be produced in all parts of the system at the end of the 24 hour period. After sterilizing, the solution shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the residual of chlorine content is not greater than .02 ppm unless otherwise noted. END OF SECTION PLUMBING 15400-3 SECTION 15650 AIR CONDITIONING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Contractor shall fumish and install where shown on the drawings, complete Summer -Winter, indoor and outdoor mounted air conditioning systems as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. 1.4 REBATES AND INCENTIVES A. Any and all rebates or incentives offered by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall go directly to the Owner. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. All units shall have capacities and efficiency ratings as scheduled. 2.2 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings a Trane combination electric heat pump blower and DX coil assembly. Unit shall be furnished with filter, evaporator, blower motor and electric heater of size and capacity as shown on the drawings. B. Unit shall be completepackage unit with all necessary controls, relays, contractors, etc., required for safety and proper operation. Electric heating section shall be of size and capacity as shown on the drawings. C. Unit shall have adjustable speed direct drive blower, filter rack and throwaway filters. Furnish 100% spare filters. Unit shall set on 1" thick cork D. Refrigeration system shall be a pad mounted air cooled condenser heat pump unit of size and capacity as shown on the drawings. Unit shall be voltage and phase as shown on the drawings. Mount unit on roof on concrete slab as indicated on the drawings. Runners shall span across a minimum of 2 roof joists. Compressor shall be equipped with a heater. s•, E. Unit shall be tested and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210-64. Provide outdoor thermostats '"" AIR CONDITIONING 15650-1 r as required for proper and safe operation. 2.3 PACKAGE TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONERS A. This Contractor shall furnish and install Power -Aire Room Air Conditioning Unit as shown and scheduled on the drawings. B. Each unit shall have electric resistance heat, electronic temperature limiting, and an internal condensate removal system. 2.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Temperature controls shall be the sole responsibility of the manufacturer of the mechanical equipment and will be furnished and installed by this Contractor. All wiring shall be by the Electrical Contractor. , B. Basic Unit Control System 1. Units shallbe furnished with a heating-coolingthermostat with locking covers and sub base switches as shown on the drawings. �•+ 2. Each unit shall be equipped with a positive fan start device on a call for heat. 3. The condensing units shallbe furnished with time off cycle devices to prevent short cycling of the compressors. They shall also have high- low pressure cutouts, 3 leg overload protection and internal thermostats in the compressor to limit winding and discharge temperature to safe limits. 4. Refrigerant control shall be by thermostatic expansion valves. 5. In addition to the above, contactors, relays and safety devices necessary for a complete operational system shall be furnished. i 2.5 WARRANTIES A. All heating and air conditioning equipment shall have one year warranty on all parts and labor, and five years on compressors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of work the Contractor shall balance the system so that the quantity and proper velocity of air is delivered at each outlet uniformly as indicated on the drawings to within ten percent (10%). Necessary adjustment shall be made to the system to produce these quantities of air, and to eliminate any objectional drafts or noise which might exist. Contractor shall perform all air balancing in the presence of the Architect's Field Representative. B. When balancing has been completed, the Contractor shall provide the Architect with all necessary data, readings, and velocities at each outlet to substantiate that the systems are balanced and providing the necessary quantities of air as shown on the drawings. C. If the Architect deems it necessary, the Contractor shall rebalance air units and correct conditions to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. END OF SECTION AIR CONDMONING 15650-2 W SECTION 15804 VENTILATING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall include the famishing of all labor and materials as required for the installation of a complete ventilating system and its related work. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM A. Furnish and install an exhaust system all as shown on the drawings. B. Provide exhaust ducts, properly flashed and waterproofed as shown. C. All inline exhaust fans shall be Cook, Greenheck, Acme, or approved equal, of size and capacity as e ' G J shown on the drawings. Fan housing shall have a baked powder painted finish. All units shall be equipped with a backdraft damper, and all exhaust ducts shall extend to the outside, properly flashed and waterproofed. D. All roof -mounted exhaustfans shallbe aluminum constructionas manufacturedby Greenheck, Cook, Acme, or approved equal. Fans shall be complete with bird screens, disconnect switches, roof curbs, and backdraft dampers. Roof curbs shall be fabricated to accommodate the roof pitch as shown on the architectural drawings. r■e E. Fan shaft bearings, for belt drive fans, shall be heavy duty regreaseable ball type in cast iron housings. 2.2 KITCHEN HOOD A. This Contractor shall furnish and install a cooking equipment hood of quality and size as indicated on the attached drawing. The hood shall be of full caption type and shall replace approximately 90% of the exhausted air with fresh outside air through registers with opposed blade balancing dampers. The make-up air shall be supplied into the kitchen through down discharge registers in a manner as not to interfere with the cooking operations below the hood. The hood shall be constructed of 18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, welded, ground and polished to the original finish of the metal. VENTILATING 15804-1 r Hoods shall have enclosure panels to extend from the hood to the ceiling with the same finish as the hood. B. Hood lights shall be U.L. approved, vaporproof, fluorescent, prewired to a switch, flush -mounted on the face of the hood. C. The hood construction shall conform with NFPA Standard No. 96 and bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal of approval. D. The exhaust fan shall be of the belt -driven vertical discharge type. The housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. The fan wheel and cone shall be aluminum and of the high-performance, centrifugal blower type, statically and dynamically balanced. The exhaust fan shall be constructed so as to include a built-in grease drain. Motor and drives shall be isolated from the exhaust airstream and shall be located in a chamber cooled by air brought in through a tube from a location free of discharge contaminates. The entire drive assembly and wheel as a unit shall be serviceable and removable through the support structure without dismantling the fan housing. The wheel shaft shall be mounted in heavy duty regreaseable ball bearings in cast iron housings and shall be coated with a petroleum base corrosion inhibitor. Drives shall be sized for 165% of driven horsepower. Motor pulleys shall be of the adjustable type for final system balancing made of cast iron and be keyed to motor and wheel shafts. The entire drive assembly shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. The exhaust fan assembly shall also include a rigid birdscreen mounted within the discharge perimeter and a thermal barrier insulating the wheel compartment from the drive compartment. The fan shall be AMCA approved for sound and air performance and also shall be U.L. listed. E. Filtered makeup air unit shall have belt driven double width/double inlet, forward curved centrifugal type supply fan. F. The entire fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent noise transmission. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty, ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. The fan shaft shall be ground and polished steel mounted in heavy duty, sealed ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum average life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speeds. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined, cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Motor sheaves shall be adjustable for final system balancing. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. G. Fan wheel shall be of the forward curved type, constructed of heavy gauge steel and statically and dynamically balanced to ensure smooth, vibration free operation. H. The fan controls shall be mounted on the face of the hood. Fan switch shall have a pilot light and fans shall be interlocked. The temperature control system shall be used for building exhaust air replacementby maintaining a constant discharge temperature of supply air. The burner is modulated to compensate for outdoor temperature changes by an electronic discharge temperature element mounted in the discharge air stream. The heater/blower operation is controlled by a manual "Summer-off/Winter" selector switch and exhaust fan interlock. 2.3 HOOD FIRE PROTECTION A. This Contractor shall furnish and install for the kitchen hood a liquid chemical system, providing complete fire protection of duct, plenum and surface equipment. Installation to be in compliance with manufacturer's U.L. listing as Ansul System number R-102. All piping run in hood to be ran VENTILATING 15804-2 ." concealed in a chase. All piping extending up through chases, ducts or plenums shall be fitted with sleeves, forming grease -tight joint. Provide chase openings for extending piping to surface nozzles. Chase to be fitted with removable panel for making field joints and final connections. Exposed !""" piping of surface protection nozzles to be Schedule 40 stainless steelpipe with chromeplated elbows. B. System shall be activated by fusible links connected to automan release. Fit automan release with electric micro switch and wire from switch to a reset relay mounted on side of automan release. Provide fuel supply shut off with electric fuel shut off devices to all cooking appliances and wiring. At time of installation, an authorized dealer of the liquid chemical system is to complete and certify the system. The fire protection system shall be connected to the building fire alarm system to activate an alarm when the system is energized. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The exhaust systems shall be installed complete with all ductwork, fans and controls as shown on the drawings. B. All roof mounted units shall be mounted on roof curbs and secured by sheetmetal screws. C. Exhaust fans shall be controlled by wall mounted switches, interlocked with light switches, or controlled by temperature sensing devices, all as scheduled on the drawings. n END OF SECTION PM VENTILATING 15804-3 SECTION 15840 DUCTWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishings of all material and labor as required for the installation of a complete duct system, as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW VELOCITY - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A All ductwork shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished airtight joints. The ducts shallbe installed as to be completely free of vibration. Metal duct slip joints shall be made with an inside radius of not less than the width of the duct, except that Factory Fabricated Air Turns shall be used where a sharper turn must be made or where otherwise indicated on the drawings. All takeoffs to registers shall be made with Factory Fabricated Deflectrols, or approved equal, and all major branches where noted on the plans shall have sputters with an accessible operating handle and locking device, Young Model No. 917 right angle gear and No. 1 ceiling regulator, or approved equal. B. All ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized iron sheets fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for Low Velocity Systems. C. Air turns shall be as manufacturedby Barber -Colman, or approved equal. No job built turning vanes will be used on this job. Where insulation is applied inside of ducts, turning vanes shall be installed inside of insulation. D. After all ducts are installed, all dirt and debris shall be removed from inside of ducts. E. Ductwork for round ducts shall conform to the latest edition ASHRAE guide. F. All duct construction seam corners and connections shall be sealed with white "Permagum Slugs" as manufactured by Virginia Chemicals, Inc. G. All dimensions indicated shall be sheet metal dimensions. Allowance shall be made for internal insulation as it occurs, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. "'" DUCTWORK 15840-1 s. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors in ductwork shall be 2" smaller in height than duct dimensions and 12" wide and located in accessible locations on both sides of all fire and smoke dampers. Doors in vertical position shall be equal to Ventlok insulated type, complete with all hinges, hardware and air seal. Doors in horizontal position shall be job built complete with sash lock, two (2) per side, and rubber air seal, all as manufactured by Ventlok, or approved equal. 2.3 ZONE VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Volume control dampers shall be furnished and installed where shown on the drawings for all air unit zone ducts with locking operator installed on bottom side of ducts. B. Dampers shall be the opposed blade type with corner bracing for stiffening as manufactured by Young Regulator Co., Model No. 817, or approved equal, of size shown on the drawings. 2.4 FIBER DUCTWORK A. Fiber ductwork will not be used on this job anywhere. 2.5 LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Furnish and install flexible connections of 30 ounce woven glass fabric from discharge and return openings of equipment to ductwork. The flexible connections shall be of a type that is airtight, equal to Ventfabrics "Ventglas", and shall be installed in such a manner that the air flow is not restricted nor the connection leaks air. At least V slack shall be allowed in connection to insure that no m vibration is transmitted from fans to ductwork. B. Fabric connections shall be UL approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All duct systems shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and shall provide a complete and working system. B. Hangers for ductwork shall be galvanized steel straps and/or electroplated zinc or hot -dipped galvanized after threading, threaded rods, minimum of 3/8" diameter. C. Hangers shall be spaced a maximum of 8'-0" on center. D. When threaded hanger rods are used, bearing plate shall be on channel and/or angle, hot -dipped galvanized after cutting, and drilling of hanger rod holes. E. Hanger rods shall be secured to channels and/or angle by galvanized washer, nut, and locket nut. Hanger rods shall be suspended from super -structure. DUCTWORK 15840-2 ii 3.2 CLEANING A. After installation is complete, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Filters shall be cleaned and/or replaced with new. Damaged paint shall be sanded and touched -up. All damaged insulation shall be replaced. END OF SECTION s f PM r� """ DUCTWORK 15840-3 I SECTION 15870 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION r�s A. The work covered by this section of the specification includes the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for the installation of a complete air diffusing system as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified. All side wall grilles, supply and returns, shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSERS A. Ceiling supply diffusers, except where shown on the drawings and/or specified, shall be all fully adjustable, all as shown on the drawings. All diffusers shall be equipped with deflectrols and opposed blade volume controls operated from the face of the diffusers and deflectrols. B. Ceiling diffusers shall be of the removable core type for 1, 2, 3 or 4-way deflection where shown on the drawings. 2.2 CEILING RETURN AIR GRILLES A. Ceiling return air grilles shall be all as shown on the drawings. 2.3 CEILING EXHAUST GRILLES A. Ceiling exhaust grilles shall be all as shown on the drawings. 2.4 FINISHES A Side wall supply registers, side wall returns and side wall exhaust grilles shall be clear anodized. Ceiling supply diffusers shall be baked off-white enamel. Ceiling return air grilles shall be baked off-white enamel. Ceiling exhaust grilles shall be baked off-white enamel. Door grilles shall be electroplated brushed bronze. Ceiling transfer grilles shall be baked off-white enamel. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15870-1 6. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. All supply registers, diffusers, return air and exhaust air grilles shall be equipped with tamperproof hex socket screws, Yum-27 hex head screws, or No. 8 Phillips Type "A' ovalhead screws. B. This Contractor shall turn over to the Owner a supply of twelve (12) volume control damper operators, twelve (12) hex socket screw wrenches, and twenty-four (24) vertical blade adjustment wrenches at completion of the job. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All grilles shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. END OF SECTION GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15870-2 SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. B. Furnish all labor, materials, service, equipment and appliances required to complete the installation of the complete electrical system in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings. C. Electrical Division Index: 16010 - General Electrical Provisions 16110 -Raceways 16120 - Conductors 16130 - Boxes and Fittings 16133 - Cabinets 16134 - Panelboards 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 - Switches and Fuses 16450 - Grounding 16500 - Lighting 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all electrical and related work as shown on the drawings and/or herein specified as follows: .,� 1. From starting point connect all panelboards, equipment, appliances, power outlets, convenience outlets, switches and controls. 2. Conduits, junction boxes, wall outlets for telephone and computer systems. 3. Conduits, wiring. r: 4. Conduits, pull wires, junction boxes for Owner furnished equipment. B. Contractor shall review all other disciplines plans and specifications for addition requirements for temperature controls, motor controls, damper actuators, etc, and shall provide wiring and installation as required. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATOR AGENCIES AND STANDARDS A. Regulatory Agencies: Installations, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), and the terns and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work required. All modifications required by these codes, rules, regulations and authorities shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge to the Owner. B. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): All materials, appliances, equipment or devices shall conform to GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-1 n ..e the applicable standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. The label of, or listing by, UL is required. C. Standards: Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the following organizations shall apply: American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material List: As soon as possible after contract award and before material is ordered, the Contractor shall submit for approval a list of all proposed material and equipment, indicating manufacturer's name and general description. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval in accordancewith the requirements contained in the SPECIAL PROVISIONS, a minimum of six (6) copies of all shop drawings after the material list has been approved and prior to ordering. Show complete outlines, dimensions, electrical services, control diagrams, electrical characteristics of special nature or critical to the installation, and pertinent data required for installation. Indicate in the transmittal that submittal has been reviewed and accepted and all contract deviations identified. In addition to, but not limited to, specific references or requests, submit shop drawings for the following applicable items: Switchboards, Panelboards, Lighting Fixtures, Primary Cable, Emergency Battery Units. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If equipment famished for installation has electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make all adjustments to wire and conduit size, controls, overcarrentprotection and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer. B. Where no specific material, apparatus, or appliance is mentioned, any fast -class product made by a reputable manufacturer maybe used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets the approval of the Engineer. C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design. D. Equipment affectedby altitude shall perform satisfactorily the function intended at an altitude of the project site. E. Materials and Equipment shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements specifiedbelow. Other materials and equipment shall be as specified elsewhereherein and as shown GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-2 I R•, on the drawings, and shall be the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in a first class workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment or material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Thoroughly test all fixtures, services, and all circuits for proper operating condition and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances, and devices shall be operated under load conditions. B. After the interior -wiring system installation is complete and at such time as the Engineer may direct, conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices, and equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications. C. Prior to acceptance or beneficial occupancy, establish nominal building power loads and record voltage readings at all panelboards. Based on these readings make final adjustments of tap changers on all transformers in the building electrical system to comply with specifications and equipment installed. D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requestedto prove acceptability. E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. The Exchange will furnish the necessary electric power. 3.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. Instructions: Without additional charge to the Owner, furnish competent instruction to the Engineer in the care, adjustment and operation of all parts of the electrical equipment and systems. B. Manuals: Upon completion of the work, prepare and deliver to the Architect two (2) sets of complete operating and maintenancemanuals for the systems and major equipment installed. Include catalog data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves and rating data, spare parts lists, and manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. C. Other: The above requirements are in addition to specific instructions and manuals specified for individual systems or equipment. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. Mark each individual motor controller, disconnect switch, transformer, and remote control device to GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-3 identify each item with its respective service. Marking may be stencilled on the enclosure or adjacent surface in utility areas. Provide nameplates in finished area. B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8 inch high where specified or noted. In general, use white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. Embossed plastic adhesive tape is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved in the device plate. C. Identify panelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, and cabinets by nameplates with descriptions indicated on the drawings together with indication of location of the feeder overcurrent protection. Install on inside of hinged doors of panelboards and cabinets. 3.5 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide record drawings showing the "asbuilt" condition of all electrical work. Information shall include but not be limited to indicating: 1. All floor outlets. 2. Underfloor duct and all connections to duct system. 3. All conduit runs including size installed. 4. All stub -up locations of conduits in floor routed up columns or walls. 5. Locations and sizes of all junction and pull boxes. B. This drawing shall be a mylar sepia of the power plans. 3.6 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical appearance upon completion. All mechanics shall be capable experienced electricians. B. Panels and cutout boxes shall be properly supported from the building construction. Boxes shall be set plumb and at height best suited for adequate operation. Wiring troughs and barriers shall be as required by the National Electric Code as amended to date. C. Symbols on drawings are approximately correct, but care shall be taken that all fixture outlets are symmetrical on spaces, ceiling panels, bays or rooms, and all switch outlets are on the strike side of doors. D. Outlets may be varied slightly in location either horizontally or vertically by the Owner before installation. Outlets for special equipment shall be located and verified on the job before final rough -in is made. E. Unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed, locate outlet boxes as follows: (Dimensions are from floor to operating device or bottom of box.) Switches Convenience Outlets Telephone Outlets Thermostats Panelboards Wallspeakers Power Outlets 4'-0" 11-4" or as noted 11-4" or as noted 5101, -- 6'0" from top of floor 8, 011 11-4" or as noted GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-4 a.: I 0 F. All work shall be concealed, and panels, boxes, etc., shall be flush type, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. All conduits and wiring shall be run from overhead unless otherwise noted. If walls do not extend to ceilings, run conduit in slabs. Conduit in shop areas may be run exposed, threaded through roof joist. G. All flush outlet boxes shall be set so that edge of cover comes flush with finished surface. Outlet boxes shall be of a suitable size and construction to serve the purpose properly. H. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any outlet box than are actually required. I. Outlet boxes shall be provided in all cases with proper supports for fixtures. J. All wires shall be polarized. No joints or taps in feeders will be permitted under any condition- K. Joints in branch circuits shall occur only where such circuits divide, and shall then consist of one (1) through circuit, to which shall be spliced the branch from this circuit. L. Wire and cable connectors shallbe solderless, mechanical type. Connectors for conductors #8 AWG and smaller shall be Buchanan Electrical Products copper squeeze -on type with molded rubber or vinyl cap, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. Scotchlock, or Ideal Industries Super Nut spring connector with molded vinyl cap. M. Conduits shall be of such size and shall be so installed that the required conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive stain. Powdered soapstone only may be used as a lubricant where necessary. Sizes of conduits shall be in accordance with National Code tables. Flexible metal conduit may be used for final connections to motors, etc., but shall not be over 48" in total length from outlet box to motor. Waterproof flexible conduit may be used in exterior locations. Connectors for conductors larger than #8 AWG shall be mechanical bolted type, insulated with clamp -on molded covers or vinyl plastic tape. The manufacturer shall be O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Co., or Burady Engineering Company. Flexible conduit smaller than 112" diameter shall not be permitted to be used. N. Where conduits enter boxes they shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts and bushings. Conduit ends shall be carefully plugged during construction. O. Conduits, except those which are vertical for their entire length, and except conduits connecting ceiling outlets together, shall have a drag consisting of a number of tight fitting rubber washers drawn through before wires are pulled in. END OF SECTION GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-5 i I I SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PARTI GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. General Provision of the Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements apply. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside. B. Intermediate.MetalConduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, lightweight steel zinc-coatedon the outside and either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Mild steel, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion- resistant coating on the. inside. D. Flexible Conduit: Commercial Greenfield, galvanized steel, with a separate grounding bond wire installed in the conduit in addition to other wires. No flexible conduit shall be installed over 2' in length- E. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel tubing with extruded liquid -tight PVC outer jacket and a continuous copperbonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. Where a separate grounding conductor is installed in the conduit, bonding conductor in the conductor in the convolutions may be omitted. F. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size 1/2 inch except where specifically approved for equipment connections. Sizes shall be as noted on the drawings and where not noted sizes shall be as required by the NEC. 2,2 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit, IMC, and EMT Fittings: Iron or steel only. Cast fittings will not be allowed. B. Flexible Conduit Fittings (Commercial Greenfield): Either steel or malleable iron only, with insulated throats, and shall be of one of the following types: 1. Wedge and screw type with angular wedge fitting between the convolutions of the conduit. RACEWAYS 16110-1 M I 2. Squeeze or clamp type with bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit and clamped by one or more screws. 3. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit convolutions. C. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Gland shall be either steel or malleable iron only with .� insulated throats and male thread and lockout or male bushing with or without "O" ring seal. Each connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected. D. Connectors and Couplings: Compression type threadless fittings for rigid steel conduit or 1MC permitted. Set screw type fittings for rigid aluminum conduit not permitted. Steel set screw connectors and couplings permitted for special conditions when approved. EMT couplings and connectors either steel or malleable iron only, "Concrete -tight" or "Rain -tight", and either the gland and ring compression type or the stainless steel multiple point locking type. Connectors to have insulated throats. EMT fittings using set screws or indentations of a means of attachment not permitted. E. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC, and rigid aluminum conduit larger than 1/2 inch size. F. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly securedto the building construction on �* opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings shall be hot -dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring. G. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits and threaded cast aluminum type for aluminum conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Conduit Systems: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, or EMT unless otherwise specified. Aluminum conduit is not permitted. B. EMT: Not permitted underground nor embedded in concrete. C. Flexible Conduits: Use flexible conduit for lights, motor or equipment connections and then only to the extent of minimum lengths required for connections. Install flexible conduit connections at all resilient -mounted equipment. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit in exterior, wet or damp locations and for connections to wet -pipe mechanical systems. D. Conduit in Concrete: Rigid steel conduit, or rigid non-metallic conduit may be embedded in concrete providing the outside diameter does not exceed one-third the thickness of the concrete slab, wall, or beam, is located entirely within the center third of the member, and lateral spacing of conduits is not less than three diameters. E. Steel Conduit in Ground: Rigid steel conduit, that is not completely encased in concrete but is in contact with ground or on a vaporbarrier, shall be wrapped in Scotchap 51 half -lapped, or shall have RACEWAYS 16110-2 an additional outside factory coating of polyvinyl chloride with a minimum coat thickness of 20 mils. Other PVC of Phenolic resin -epoxy coating material which is equally flexible and chemically resistant may be used providing approval by the Engineer is obtained prior to installation. F. Exposed Conduits: Install exposed conduit systems parallel to or at right angles to the lines of the building. Right angle bends in exposed runs shall be made with standard elbows, screw jointed conduit fittings or conduit bent to radii not less than those of standard elbows. G. Concealed Conduits: Install conduit systems concealed where possible unless otherwise noted. Conduit systems may be exposed in unfinished utility areas, ceiling cavities, and where specifically approved by the Engineer. Install concealed conduit systems in as direct lines as possible. H. Exterior Underground Conduit: Galvanized rigid steel conduit, wrapped as above, shall be used for all circuits outside the building slab. Conduit shall be buried a minimum of 2'-6" below finished grade. Concrete encased PVC conduit may be used for all conductors except the service entrance secondary. 1. Conduit Bends: In any conduit or EMT run the number of quarter bends or equivalent between terminations at cabinets or boxes shall not exceedfour (4) bends for conduits up to 1-1/4 inch, three (3) bends for 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch conduits, and two (2) bends for 3- to 4-inch conduits. Conduits .�, run between cabinets or boxes shall not exceed 100 feet for straight runs nor 100 feet for runs with maximum number of bends. Bends in telephone feeder conduits shall be long -radius. J. Conduit Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits or EMT terminating in the bottoms of boxes or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to installation of conductors. K. Sealing Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, and where otherwise indicated. L. Sleeves for Conduit: Install. sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit sleeves not used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduit passing through walls. Sleeves that are used shall be caulked tight with lead yarn. 3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT as required by the National Electrical Code, including runs above suspended ceilings. In suspended ceiling construction, only lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. No supports shall be permitted from metal roof decks. B. Straps: Install one -hole pipe straps on conduits 1-1/2 inch or smaller. Install individual pipe hangers for conduits larger than 1-1/2 inch Spring steel fasteners with hanger rods may be used in dry locations in lieu of pipe straps. , C. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers where two or more horizontal conduits or EMT run parallel and at the same elevation. Secure each conduit or EMT to the horizontal hanger member by a U- bolt, one -hole strap or other specially. designed and approved fastener. D. Hanger Rods: Install 3/16 inch diameter or larger steel rods for trapezes, spring steel fasteners, clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be used for the support of any conduit, EMT or light fixtures in open ceiling areas. "d RACEWAYS 16110-3 E. Fastening: Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts. Wooden plugs and shields shall not be used. Power -driven fasteners may be used to attach pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete where approved by the Engineer. F. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be firmly secured by means of pipe clamps, hangers, etc., equal to Caddy Fasteners of ERICO Products, Inc. Wire wrapped around conduits and supporting members will not be acceptable. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Contractor shall furnish as -built drawings showing routing and/or terminations of all conduit and boxes run into floor and from underfloor into wall or above ceiling terminations. 3.4 CLOSING OF OPENINGS A. Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in floors or walls for the passage of conduits t ' or other forms of raceway, including bus ducts, such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such openings, shall be filled or closed in a manner approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION r-A s, PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS) A. Conform to the applicable UL and IPCEA Standards for the use intended. Copper conductors with 600 volt insulation. Stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger. Aluminum conductors shall not be permitted. B. Insulation: Type THHN insulation minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Type THW minimum or Type XHHHW filled cross -linked polyethylene 90 deg. C thermosetting insulation for conductors No. 8 or larger. 90 deg. C minimum insulation within fixture wireways of fluorescent fixtures, Type RF-2 or TF commercial fixture wire, No. 16 AWG may be used for Class 2 remote control and signal circuits. C. Size: No. 12 AWG minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Not less than NEC requirements for the system to be installed. Conductors for trench circuits of 120 volts, or more than 100 feet long from panel to load center, shall be No. 10 AWG. Class 1 remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuit conductors shall be not less than No. 16 AWG. If Contractor furnishes other than specified equipment, it shall be his responsibility to furnish proper size conduit and conductors as required without additional cost to the Owner. D. Conductors shall be color coded as follows: 120/208V s•, Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue •• Neutral White Ground Green �^ Connect all conductors of the same color to the same phase conductor. Conductors No. 12 and 10 shall be solid color compound for the entire length. Conductor sizes larger than No. 10 maybe color CONDUCTORS 16120-1 coded at each termination and in each box or enclosure with 6 inches of half -lapped 3/4 inch pressure -sensitive, plastic tape of respective colors in lieu of solid color compound. 2.2 COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC CABLE A. Foil shielded twisted pair cable shall be stranded equal to Belden "Belfoil", sized as required. B. Unless otherwise noted, co -axial cable shall be Belden RG-59, 20 AWG. C. As required or specified in the section of these specifications specifying the equipment. Cable shall be continuous from backboards or panels to outlets or other termination points without splices. 2.3 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS A. Split wedge type supports which clamp each individual conductor and tightens due to weight of the cable shallbe used for cables without metallic sheath. Basket weave type supports shall be used for �. cables with metallic sheath. 2.4 CONNECTORS AND LUGS A. For Copper Conductors No. 6 and smaller: 3M Scotch-Lok or T&B Sta-Kon compression or indent type connectors with integral or separate insulating caps. B. For Copper Conductors Larger than No. 6: Solderless, indent, hex screw, or bolt -type pressure connectors, properly taped or insulated. 2.5 TAPE A. Plastic tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms minimum insulation resistance, oil -resistant vinyl backing, oil -resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of supporting combustion per ASTM D-568 Test Method B. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE AND CABLE TESTS (600 VOLTS) A. Measure the insulating resistance of service entrance conductors, feeder circuit conductors, and service ground. Measurements shall be taken between conductors and between conductors and ground. Resistance shall be 1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without branch circuit loads. Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the Engineer, and shall be in accordance with the applicable IPCEA Standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in presence of the Engineer. Submit written reports of the tests and results shall be furnished to the Engineer. 3.2 SPLICES (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) A. Permitted only at outlets or accessible enclosures. Conductor lengths shall be continuous from termination to termination without splices unless approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION CONDUCTORS 16120-2 FW SECTION 16130 BOXES AND FITTINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 A. B. Grounding - Section 16450 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Construction: Zinc -coated or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes of a class to satisfy the condition at each outlet except where unilet or condulet bodies are required. Knockout type with knockouts removed only where necessaryto accommodate the conduit entering. Square cornered, straight sided gang boxes, 4 inch octagon concrete rings and 4 inch octagon hung ceiling boxes with bars may be folded type; one-piece deep -drawn type for all other boxes. B. Size: To accommodate the required number and sizes of conduits, wires and splices in accordance with NEC requirements, but not smallerthan size shown or specified. Standard concrete type boxes not to exceed 6 inches deep except where necessary to permit entrance of conduits into sides of boxes without interference with reinforcing bars. Special purpose boxes shall be sized for the device or application intended. C. Fixture Studs: 3/8 inch malleable -iron fixture stud in outlet boxes for ceiling lighting fixtures and interior bracket lighting fixtures, other than lamp receptacles and drop cards. D. Exposed: Screw joint type, with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations exposed to the weather. E. Tile Boxes: Rectangularin shape with square corners and straight sides for receptacles and switches mounted in furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick stone or wood walls. Install without plaster rings. F. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacleand Signal Boxes: Unless otherwise noted or specified, not less than 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep for signal devices, 4-11/16 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep for two devices and multigang boxes for more than two devices. Boxes for switches and receptacles on unfinished walls may be screw joint type with covers to fit the devices. G. Wall -Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. H. Light Fixture Boxes: 4 inch diameter by 1-1/2 inch deep minimum for ceiling and interior bracket "'"' BOXES AND FITTINGS 16130-1 A" fixtures with concealed conduits. Plaster covers for bracket fixtures to have 3 inch diameter openings. Screw joint boxes with canopy seat for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with exposed conduits. I. Grounding Terminal: Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green equipment ground conductor, for serving motors, lighting fixtures, or receptacles. Grounding terminal shall be green -colored washer -in -hand machine screw or grounding bushing. 2.2 PULL BOXES A. Minimum NEC requirements unless larger box is noted. Pull boxes with internal volume not more than 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for outlet boxes with blank covers. Pull boxes with internal volume over 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for cabinets except covers shall be same thickness as box and shall have corrosion -resistant screws or bolt attachments. 2.3 FLOOR BOXES A. Heavy-duty, cast, adjustable type suitable for the device or application indicated, unless noted. Provide carpet flanges in carpeted area. Each telephone outlet shall consist of a horizontal cast aluminum housing with a one inch bushed side opening. Outlets shall have provisions to accommodate a ten wire telephone terminal block. Gaskets shall be used to insure proper installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Installation: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, outlet boxes shall be flush mounted and the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers shall be flush with the finished wall or ceiling line, or, if installed in walls and ceilings of incombustible construction, not more than 1/4 inch back of same. Mount boxes with the long axes of devices vertical, unless otherwise specified. Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings shall be provided with plaster covers. A multiple of box extensions and/or covers will not be permitted. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with suitable metal bar hangers, box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood, expansion shields on masonry and machine screws on steel work. B. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall -mounted outlet box shall be construed to mean the height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. On exposed tile, block, or brick construction mount outlet boxes at the nearest bed joint in the mounting height indicated. Verify with Architect. C. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., mount so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. Install outlet boxes near doors or windows close to the trim. Install outlet boxes near the doors on the lock sides as shown on architectural drawings, unless other locations are approved by the Architect. 3.2 PULL BOXES A. Provide additional pull boxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for maximum lengths of conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under Conduit and Fittings. BOXES AND FITTINGS 16130-2 3.3 FLOOR BOXES A. Install level with top covers adjusted flush with finished floor or floor tile. 3.4 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS A. Recessed or surface light fixtures in lay -in or accessible ceilings shall be connected with minimum 1/2 inch flexible metallic conduit, 4 to 6 feet long, with grounding provided. Flexible conduit shall not be used as the ground. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all exposed junction and pull boxes according to the system and voltage carried by means .• of painted -on stencils or labels, with legible letters and contrasting colors and without abbreviations. In general, use yellow color. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 9 - Finishes. END OF SECTION BOXES AND FITTINGS 16130-3 SECTION 16133 CABINETS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Sheet steel except those exposed to wet or rain conditions which shall be raintight unless otherwise noted. Cabinets without through feeder wiring shall be arranged to provide a wiring gutter not less than 4 inches wide for branch circuit panelboards served by feeders up to 4/0. Panelboards served by feeders in excess of 4/0 up to and including 750 MCM, shall be provided with top, bottom and side gutters 8 inches wide. Cabinets shall be of standard make and shall be equal in all respects to those bearing the Underwriters' Laboratories label. Cabinets, including boxes, shall be made of galvanized steel. All outside surfaces of trim and doors shall be given a factory finish coat of No. 61 ANSI gray paint, or approved manufacturer's standard. Cabinets for communications systems shall have 5/8 inch exterior grade, one -face B-grade or equal plywood backboard inside with maximum height and width. 2.2 FRONTS A. One-piece sheet steel frame and a hinged door with catch and lock for flush cabinets. Telephone and signal cabinets for surface mounting shall be equipped with a door hinged directly to cabinet. One-piece sheet steel 3/4 inch flange around all edges shaped to cover edge of box. Fronts may be secured to box by means of flathead screws with captive nuts or clamps. 2.3 DOORS A. Doors shall close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the frame, with a close fitting joint between door and frame. The doors shall be fitted with substantial flush hinges placed not over 24 inches apart, nor more than 6 inches from ends of doors, fastened permanently to the door and frame with round -headed rivets or spot welds, or with concealed flush piano hinges. Fastening screws of fronts shall be set not over 24 inches apart. Doors over 48 inches in height shall be equipped with a vault handle and a three-point catch. 2A LOCKS A. Furnish each cabinet with a combination catch and flat key lock. The telephone, electrical and signal cabinet locks shall be fitted to separate keying for each system. Furnish two keys for each cabinet. CABINETS 16133-1 2.5 GROUND BAR A. Each cabinet for a panelboard shall be provided with a copper interior ground bar suitably braced or bolted to the cabinet wall. The equipment ground bar shall be equivalent in current carrying capacity to the incoming feeder ground conductor and shall have approved pressure connector terminations for the associated feeders, branch circuits, etc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CABINETS A. Cables installed in the wiring gutters of cabinets shall be neatly bundled, routed, and supported. Minimum bending radii as recommended by the cable manufacturer shall not be reduced. Lighting and power cabinets shall be installed with tops 6 feet 6 inches above floor and bottoms not less than 12 inches above floor. END OF SECTION e. ""' CABINETS 16133-2 SECTION 16134 PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Cabinets - Section 16133 ti.. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, descriptive literature, and complete description of the frame size, trip setting, class, and interrupting rating of all overcurrent devices. Identify available spaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish and install at locations as shown on the drawings approved panelboards of a type indicated and specified herein. B. Panels identified on the drawings for use as service equipment shall be so labeled. C. Panelboards shall comply with the applicable sections of UL, NEC and NEMA and shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse Electric Corporation. 2.2 INTERIORS A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled with bolt -on devices. They shallbe designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors. B. Unless otherwise noted, full size .insulated neutral bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. C. Main bus bars shall be plated aluminum or copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. D. A copper ground bus shall be included in all panels. r�, PANELBOARDS 16134-1 .A, 2.3 BOXES A. Boxes shall be at least 20 inches wide made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electric Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. B. Boxes shall be provided with removable blank ends. 2.4 TRIMS A. Trims for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door over all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semi -flush cylinder lock and catch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners. B. Distributionpanelboard trims shall coverall live parts. Switching device handles shall be accessible. C. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed and a finish coat of gray ANSI 61 paint applied. D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box Flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4 of an inch on all sides. E. A directory card with clear plastic cover shall be supplied mounted on the inside of each door. F. Provide an engraved nameplate for each panel section. 2.5 PANELBOARD RATINGS A. Panelboards rated 240 VAC or less shall have short circuit ratings as shown on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. B. Breakers shall be a minimum of 100 ampere frame. Breakers 15 through 100 amperes trip size shall take up the same pole spacing. C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit raging. 2.6 SPACE ONLY A. Where "space only" is noted on the drawings, provide necessary connectors, mounting brackets, etc., for the future insertion of an overcurrent device. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CIRCUITING A. Special care shall be taken so that circuits are connected to the panels in such an arrangement as to insure, insofar as possible, that loads on the different phases at the panel are balanced. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS 16134-2 sue+ Pat SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. e� 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SNAP SWITCHES A. Unless otherwise specified, each snap switch (flush tumbler -toggle) shall be of the A.C. general use type for mounting in a single -gang spacing, fully rated 20 amperes minimum on inductive and resistive loads at 120/277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL 20 Fifth Edition Standard snap Switches and further requirements herein specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single pole, 3-way or 4-way, of the maintained, momentary, or lock type as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall operate in any position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with entire body of molded phenolic, urea or melamine P. with cover of molded phenolic, urea or melamine. Fibre, paper or similar insulating material shall not be used for body or cover. Ivory color handles unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Silver or silver alloy contacts. A.C. 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of withstanding tests as outlined in NEMA Publication WD1-1965, and shall be as follows unless otherwise noted: 20A 120/277 AC Leviton 1P 1221-I 2P 1222-I 3-way 1223-I 4-way 1224-I ^° 3 position 2 cct maintained 1385-I 3-position 2 cct momentary 1557-I Lighted handle pilot light 1221-PL r*+ Dimmers 61000-W 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in accordance with NEMA Publication WD1-1965, Part 3 and Part 10, and the Texas Department of Human Services Minimum Standards for Day Care Centers, Section 4300, Number 1, Part A. r Fire-resistant, non -absorptive, hot -welded, phenolic composition or equalbodies and bases with metal �"' WRUNG DEVICES 16140-1 I plaster ears (integral with the supporting member). Single or duplex as shown or noted on drawings. Ivory color unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong. B. Grounding Type: All receptacle shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal equipment ground screw of adequate size to accommodate an insulated grounding jumper (based on Table 250-95 of the NEC with minimum size No. 14 AWG). Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall be internally connected to the receptacle mounting yoke. C. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles shall be as follows:' 20A - 125V AC 2P 3W Leviton 5362-SC-I D. Weatherproof receptacles shall consist of duplex receptacle as specified above, mounted in a box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal coverplate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a short length of bead chain or shall be of the spring hinged flap type. E. Isolated grounding receptacles shall be the same NEMA configuration as 20A 125 volt receptacle except that the grounding pole shall be isolated from the mounting strap and be colored orange similar to Hubbell #1G5251 or 1G4262. Ground these devices by means of a separate green equipment grounding conductor. F. Special: Receptaclesfor special applications shall be as indicated on the drawings. This Contractor shall verify exact requirements and furnish a matching receptacle where indicated. G. All 220V receptacles in areas within children's reach shall have safety covers. 2.3 PLUG CAPS A. Except for duplex receptacles, one matchingplug cap shall be provided for each receptacle. No plug caps are required for duplex receptacles. Provide watertight, male plug caps in damp locations or where exposed to weather. r 2.4 DEVICE PLATES A. General: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and telephone outlet, and special purpose outlet. Provide multi -gang outlet plates for multi -gang boxes. Plates on finished walls shall be of stainless steel. Screws shall be metal with counter- sunk heads, in a color to match the finish of the plate. B. Exposed: Plates for exposed screw jointed fittings shall match the fittings with edges of plates flush with edges of fittings. Heavy cadmium plated steel with gasket. Plates for cast type boxes at locations subject to wet or rain conditions shall be of the cast, vapor -tight type. Provide hinged lift covers for devices. C. Communication: Plates for telephone and intercommunication have a 1/2 inch bushed opening in the center. D. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular application. WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DEVICE PLATES A. Install with alignment tolerance of 1/16th inch and all edges in continuous contact with wall surfaces. END OF SECTION r* A s. PM WIRING DEVICES 16140-3 P" wo M" SECTION 16170 SWITCHES AND FUSES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. 30 to 1200 Amperes 250 Volts Ac, Dc; 600 Volts Ac 2, 3 Poles Fusible and Non -Fusible Copper Terminals Enclosures NEMA 1 General Purpose NEMA 3R Raintight B. Furnish and install where indicated heavy duty type safety switches having the electrical characteristics, ratings and modifications shown on the drawings. Safety switches shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse. C. All switches shall have: NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless otherwise noted; metal nameplates, front cover mounted, that contain a permanent record on switch type, catalog number and Hp ratings (with both standard and time delay fuses); handle whose position is easily recognizable and is padlockable in the "OFF" position; visible blades; reinforced fuse clips; nonteasible, positive, quick make -quick break mechanisms; and switch assembly plus operating handle as an integral part of the enclosure base. 2.2 FUSES A. General: Dual element, time delay type, based on heavy service, Buss Fusetron or equal. B. Current Limiting Fuses: Provide where indicated on the drawings. Feederprotection in conjunction with fused switches, install NEMA Class L fuses sized 125% of load current or as required for coordination. Current limiting high -interrupting capacity fuses coordinated with molded case circuit breakers shall be furnished by the circuit breaker manufacturer. SWITCHES AND FUSES 16170-1 C. Coordination: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide basic selective protection and properly coordinate with the other associated protective equipment. D. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3,1 DISCONNECTING MEANS A. Install in each location indicated on the drawings. 3.2 SPARE FUSES A. Furnish one complete set of each size of current limiting fuse other than Fusetron, each size of current limiting fuse installed for circuit breaker protection, and each size Fusetron fuse in excess of 30 amperes. Also one spare set of each size high voltage fuses installed. END OF SECTION SWITCHES AND FUSES 16170-2 SECTION 16450 .� GROUNDING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Raceways - Section 16110 C. Panelboards - Section 16134 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Materials, equipment and devices related to the grounding system are specified under other sections of these specifications. -' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A_ Install two separate grounding systems: a service grounding system and an equipment grounding system. The service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets, equipment and neutral conductor shall be grounded in accordance with the minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the drawings or specified. Connect the two grounding systems together only at the main service equipment and the secondary terminals or transformers creating separately derived distribution systems, such as dry -type transformers. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the minimum code N requirements and as further indicated on the drawings or specified. The equipment ground (green conductor) consists of metallic connections to ground of noncurrent -carrying metal parts of the wiring system or apparatus connected to the systems. The primary purpose of equipment grounding a is to provide greater safety by limiting the electricalpotential between non -current -carrying parts of the system, and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. v B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point as specified elsewhere in this section of the specifications for interconnection of the equipment grounding system and the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Service Equipment Enclosure: Bond the enclosure of the main service equipment in the uninsulated GROUNDING 16450-1 i equipment ground bus (or bar) with a conductor or bar sized for 25% of the largest service overcurrent device. D. Ground Bar: Provide an uninsulated equipment ground bar, separate from any insulated neutral bar, in all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment ground conductors. The ground bar shall be an integrally mounted and braced bus bar in switchboards, or a separately mounted bar adequatelybraced or bolted to the enclosure of other types of equipment. The ground bar shall be adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure after thoroughly cleaning both surfaces to assure good contact. Provide solderless pressure connectors for all conductor terminations. Number and size of pressure connectors on equipment grounding bars as required for the termination of equipment grounding conductors. In addition to the active circuits, provide pressure connectors for all three phase spares and spaces. E. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection to a metallic housing of electrical equipment by means of lock nut and bushings provide ground bushing connected with a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the electrical equipment. Metallic conduits containing ground wiring only shall be bonded to the ground wire at both conduit entrance and exit. Install grounding conductor in each non-metallic conduit or duct except those used for telephone, sound or low voltage signals, and in all flexible conduit that does not have a built-in ground conductor. Bond the conductor at both ends in the equipment grounding system F. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductorfor each single or three phase feeder and each branch circuit with a three phase protective device. Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for a single phase branch circuit where indicated on the drawings. Install the required grounding conductor in the common conduit or raceway with the related phase and/or neutral conductors and connect to the box or cabinet grounding terminal. Where there are parallel feeders installed in more than one raceway, each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment ground conductor. G. Devices: Install a minimum No. 12 green insulated equipment bonding conductor from a grounding terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the green ground terminal of all receptacles and through flexible conduit to all light fixture housings. H. Motors: Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from the equipment ground bar in the motor control center or separate starter through the conduit and flexible conduit to the ground terminal in the connection box mounted on the motor. Install the grounding conductor in the common conduit or raceway with the related circuit conductor. 3.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. The grounding conductors for both service ground electrodes shall be insulated or bare copper, sized in accordance with NEC 250-94, including the conductor for the made electrode. The conductors shall be continuous without joint or splice, and shall be installed in conduit with the conduit bonded to the conductor at each end. Install the conductor to permit the shortest and most direct path, and terminate in the main service equipment on the common ground point. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors equivalent to the insulation on the associated phase conductor, but not less than Type TW. The equipment grounding conductor or straps shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Where one feeder service serves a series of panelboards or transformers, the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuous without splices. Grounding conductors shall not be installed through metal -sheathed holes. All connections shall be available for inspection and maintenance. GROUNDING 16450-2 s�+ 3.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS A. Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or clamps. If surface is coated, the coating must be removed down to the bare metal. After the coating has been removed, apply a non- corrosive approved compound to cleaned surface and install lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing is removed from metal, it shall be painted or touched up with "Galvanox". B. Contractor shall provide Isotrol PGE-8 ground module to meet code requirements for special procedure areas. 3.5 TESTS A. Test the completed grounding system with an ohmmeter at the service ground bar and submit a written report to the Engineer for approval. The service shall not be energized if the test shows more than 5 ohms, unless approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION r� GROUNDING 16450-3 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval complete shop drawings, catalog cuts, special installation instructions, photometric data, and descriptive literature. When fixtures are proposed for substitution and prior approval has not been issued, the submittal for approval shall include catalog cuts of both the specified and proposed fixtures. Catalog numbers shown on the Fixture Schedule are indicative of the general type desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality will be acceptableif approved by the Engineer. All fluorescent fixtures shall be of the type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Furnish all lighting fixtures throughout of the type indicated on the drawings, complete with lamps, sockets, wiring, fitters, hangers, plaster rings, etc., as required. 2.2 LAMPS A. Fluorescent: 32W F32/T8/SP35/WM unless noted otherwise. '^ B. Incandescent: Inside frosted; extended service, 130 volt. C. H.I.D.: Clear unless noted, Type 'T 'self -extinguishing. Universal burning lamps will not be accepted. D. Manufacturers: General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania. 71' 2.3 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent: UL approved, high power factor with ETL certified CBM label, suitable for 120V operation as required. Sound rating of "A" for interior installations. Provide premium Class P protected ballasts with built-in thermally actuated automatic reclosing device. Manufacturers shall !00 LIGHTING 16500-1 On certify in writing that the ballast hot spot shall not exceed 90 deg. F, ambient temperature. Ballasts shall be energy savings type. Provide two (2) bolt attachment of ballasts. B. H.I.D.: One lamp type as required for the application. Suitable for use with H.I.D. lamps. Ballast for exterior H.I.D. lamps shall be rated for -20 deg. F. C. Manufacturers: Advance Mark III, General Electric MaxiMiser I. 2.4 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. All fixtures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all sections of the channel structure shall be securely held in position. Fixtures shall not be mounted in such a way that ballast hum will be amplified or transmitted into work areas. B. Fluorescent fixtures indicatedto have dual switching shall have the inboard lamps connectedto one ballast and the outboard lamps connected to the other ballast. 2.5 FINISH A. Bonderized or equal treatment on all steel parts prior to applying finish. Metal parts shall be aluminum, brass, copper, bronze, or steel, with powder coat, post -fabrication baked white enamel finish unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDERS A. Designed so lamps will be held firmly in place, electrically and mechanically, permitting easy insertion or removal of lamps. Provide corrosion resistant treated lamp pin contacts. 2.7 CEILING TRIM A. Furnish proper ceiling frames for ceiling material in which recessed fixtures are to be installed. Verify prior to ordering. 2.8 LENS A When an acrylic lens or diffuser is specified, it shall be of 100% acrylic meeting American Society for Testing Materials specifications for Methacrylate Molding and Extrusion Compounds (ASTM D788-63). Plastic diffusing panels, luminous sides panels and other luminous plastic members of fixtures shall be made of not less than 0.156 inch thick prismatic Pattern 19 clear acrylic material. Plastic shall be non-flammable or shall have a flame spread rate of not more than 3.2 inches per minute for a 112 inch width of the material. The plastic shall show no yellowing apparent to the naked eye either when subjected to the accelerated weathering test in accordance with ASTM D-795-44T (500 hours exposure, using type S-1 lamp) or after prolonged exposure to a fluorescent lamp source under conditions identical with those existing in the fixture in which it is to be used. The plastic shall be non -electrostatic or the finished parts shall be treated with an anti -static wax. 2.9 HOUSING A. Not less than 20 gauge steel with baked white enamel finish applied over corrosion -resistant primer unless otherwise specifically approved. �"" LIGHTING 16500-2 'J PART '3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPORTS A. Support ceiling fixtures by anchorage to the ceiling only where the ceiling is concrete or masonry units. Provide mounting angles on trapeze where required to support light fixtures between structural members. No lighting fixtures, conduit or outlet boxes shall be supported from the building sheet metal deck. Where lay -in construction is used, fixtures shall be on the lay -in type. Coordinate supports for lay -in fixtures with Ceiling Contractor. 3.2 LOW DENSITY CEILING A. Special attention is directed to the code restriction against mounting fluorescent fixtures on combustible low -density cellulose fiberboard (NEC 410-76(6)). If fixtures are to be installed that are not UL approved for this condition, a suitable mounting arrangement shall be developed which meets the approval of the Engineer. 3.3 CEILING TRIM AND MEANS OF SUPPORT A. The ceiling true and means of support of recessed fixtures shall be coordinated with the type of ceiling to be installed to insure proper installation. 3A BLOCKING A. Protect housings of recessed lighting fixtures during installation of internal blocking or framing to prevent distortion of sides or dislocation of threaded lugs which upon completion must be in perfect alignment and match the corresponding holes in frames or rims so that holding screws can be installed freely without forcing and remain so they can be easily removed when servicing. Threads to receive holding screws shall be chased after plating and finishing to insure easy installation and removal of knurled beaded screws by thumb pressure. 3.5 LAMP GUARDS A. Provide safety guard clips on open type fluorescent fixtures to prevent lamps from falling. 3.6 CLEAN-UP +"^ A. At final inspection, the fixtures and lighting equipment shall be in first class operating order, in perfect condition as to finish, free from defects, completely lamped, clean and free from dust, plaster or paint spots, and complete with the required glassware, reflectors, side panels, louvers or other components necessary to complete the fixtures. 3.7 LAMPS A. Install new lamps in all lighting fixtures seven (7) days before building acceptance or beneficial occupancy, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION �,, LIGHTING 16500-3